Home

B-SX4T/SX5T Series Service Manual - EO0-33013A

image

Contents

1. 5 48 2 60 a aC 5 49 5 6 7 Non Printing 5 49 9 6 8 Faclony E 5 50 5 6 9 AUtO dil 5 50 SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 5 51 5 7 1 Sensor Status 5 52 5 7 2 Mark Sensor Adjustment 5 53 5 7 3 Feed Gap Sensor 5 53 5 7 4 Black Mark Sensor and Feed Gap Sensor Adjustment No Paper 5 54 5 75 Ribbon End Sensor 5 54 RAM 5 55 5 8 1 Clear Menu Selection 5 55 5 8 2 No RAM 5 56 18 33012 5 8 3 Maintenance Counter 9 96 5 8 4 Printer Parameter 1
2. 4 4 4 2 ROTARY CUTTER 8204 4 7 4 3 STRIP MODULE 9904 4 11 44 RIBBON SAVING MODULE B 9904 R QM 4 17 45 PCMCIA INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 PCM QM 4 20 4 6 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM 4 23 47 LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM 4 27 4 8 EXPANSION I O INTERFACE BOARD B 7704 IO QM 4 31 SYSTEM MODE 5 1 51 OPERATION PANEL 5 1 5 22 OVERVIEW a 5 2 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC 5 5 3 5 3 1 Printing Mode 5 5 4 5 3 2 Dispensing Mode 5 4 5 3 3 Maintenance Counter Parameter Settings Printing Out 5 5 5 3 4 Self Diagnostic Test and Result Print
3. 4940 UPC A 67890 2345 CODE39 Standard ABCDEFG1234F JANI3 EANI3 4 901480 079516 EAN13 2 digits 12 9 780123 456786 CODE128 BCDEFGHI CODE93 ABCabc123 UPC E 5 digits 23 123456 5 EANS 5 digits 4940 0458 UPC A 22 digits 12545 12345 ll 5 67890 EA4 2 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES Cont 5 digits 12545 6789 Industrial 2 of 5 Customer bar code TOU TTD ph KIX Code DUC TIT UTD LIU RSS 14 RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional Data Matrix UCC EAN128 00 0 0017457 174015906 7 POSTNET
4. 5 56 5 9 IP ADDRESS 5 58 5 10 BASIC 5 61 5 10 1 Basic Specification Selection Mode 5 61 5 10 2 Basic File Browser 5 62 5 10 3 Basic Trace Selection Mode 5 62 5 11 DOWNLOAD MODE 5 63 6 ON LINE 6 1 651 THRESHOLD SETTING 6 6 02 a a a 6 7 6 3 DUMP 6 8 7 PROGRAM 7 1 7 1 OUTLINE OF 5 7 1 7 2 DOWNLOAD PROGRAM 7 1 721 System
5. 7 1 7 2 2 TEL 73 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD 7 2 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 8 1 9 9 1 10 MAJOR UNIT 10 1 10 1 POWER SUPPLY 10 1 10 2 MAIN PC 10 3 10 3 PANEL PC BOARD AND LCD UNIT 10 5 103 a RE 10 5 10 3 2 Panel PC 10 6 10 4 STEPPING 10 7 10 5 RIBBON MOTORS TAKE UP FEED 10 9 10 5 1 Ribbon Motor Take up 10 9 10 5 2 Ribbon Motor Feed 10 11
6. 5 32 5 4 27 Back Feed Speed Selection 5 32 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT 5 33 551 Feed Length Fine Adjustment 5 34 9 5 2 Cut Strip Position Fine Adjustment 5 35 5 5 3 Back Feed Length Fine 5 37 5 5 4 X Axis Fine Adjustment 5 38 5 5 5 Print Tone Fine Adjustment Thermal Transfer Thermal Direct Print 5 39 5 5 6 X Ribbon Motor Voltage Fine Adjustment Feed Take up Motor 5 40 5 5 7 Threshold Manual Fine Adjustment Black Mark Feed Gap Sensor 5 41 TEST 5 42 5 6 1 Specifying the Print Condition for the Test Print 5 44 5 6 2 X Test Print Pattern 5 0 47 5 6 3 Slant Line 1 dot 5 47 5 6 4 Slant Line 3 0 15 5 48 5 6 5 Characters
7. 5 10 5 35 Print Head Element 9 15 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 16 5 4 1 Character Code Selection 5 17 5 4 2 Zero Font Code Selection 9 20 94 9 Baud Rate SelectloIs eeeesnenee reae eua anuu ce tacui de eee see eee eee dE cS 5 21 5 4 4 Data Length 5 21 5 4 5 Stop Bit Selection 9 21 5 4 6 Parity Selection 9 22 5 4 7 Transmission Control Code Selection 5 22 5 4 8 LCD Message Selection 5 23 5 4 9 Auto Forward Wait Selection 5 23 5 4 10 Head Up Cut Rewinder Selection 5 24 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 18 33012 5 4 11 Ribbon Saving Function Selection 5 24 5 4 12 Control Code Selection
8. 5 25 5 4 13 Strip Status 5 26 5 4 14 FEED Key Function Selection 5 26 5 4 15 KANJI Code Selection 5 27 5 4 16 EURO Code Selection 5 27 5 4 17 Auto Print Head Check 5 28 5 4 18 Centronics Interface ACK BUSY Timing Selection 5 28 5 4 19 Web Printer Function Selection 5 29 5 4 20 Input Prime 5 5 30 5 4 21 Ribbon Near End Selection 5 30 5 4 22 Expansion I O Interface 5 30 5 4 23 Centronics Interface Selection 5 31 5 4 24 Plug amp Play 5 31 5 4 25 Label End Selection 5 31 5 4 26 5 Selection
9. RESTART lt 4 gt TEST PRINT NON PRINTING FEED RESTART lt 4 gt PRINT FACTORY TEST FSER RESTART lt 4 gt PRINT AUTO PRINT TRAN FEED RESTART lt 4 gt TEST PRINT AUTO PRINT REFL FEED RESTART PAUSE Issue 5 42 18 33012 5 6 TEST PRINT Regular mode Print condition setting PAUSE KA TEST PRINT ISSUE COUNT 1 Use the FEED RESTART key to select a desired option PAUSE lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PRINT SPEED 6 s Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option PAUSE lt 4 gt PRINT SENSOR TRANS Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option PAUSE lt 4 gt TEST PRINT TRANSER Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option PAUSE lt 4 gt TEST PRINT TYPES NO CUT Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option PAUSE lt 4 gt PRINT LABEL LEN Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option PAUSE KA TEST PRINT PAPER FEED Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option PAUSE The printer feeds one media 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 6 TEST PRINT While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x
10. 10 34 10 14 RIBBON END 10 36 10 15 FAN 10 38 This manual is intended for both B SX4T series and B SX5T series Please note that the illustrations and pictures provided are of the B SX4T series CAUTION This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC The contents of this manual may be changed without notification Please refer to your local Authorised Service representative with regard to any queries you may have in this manual Copyright 2003 by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 570 Ohito Ohito cho Tagata gun Shizuoka ken JAPAN 1 UNPACKING 18 33012 1 1 PROCEDURE 1 UNPACKING 1 1 PROCEDURE 1 Open the carton 2 Unpack the accessories and the front pad from the carton Accessories Carton Front Pad 3 Unpack the pads and the printer from the carton Printer Right Side Pad a Left Side Pad Bottom Pad 4 Remove the four pieces of tape and the rear pad from the printer Tape Rear Pad 1 1 1 UNPACKING 18 33012 1 2 CHECKS 5 Open the top cover and remove the five pieces of tape And then open the ribbon shaft holder plate to remove the ribbon shaft pad from the printer Ribbon
11. Customer bar code of high priority be ddnde ped RM4SCC e ph ool RSS 14 Stacked i Prin EL RSS Limited RSS Expanded PDF417 Ds Micro PDF417 2 CP Code ee al 4 3 GLOSSARIES GLOSSARIES Bar code A code which represents alphanumeric characters by using a series of black and white stripes in different widths Bar codes are used in various industrial fields Manufacturing Hospitals Libraries Retail Transportation Warehousing etc Reading bar codes is a fast and accurate means of capturing data while keyboard entry tends to be slow and inaccurate Batch mode Issue mode that continuously prints media until the specified number of media has been printed Black mark A mark printed on the media so that the printer can maintain a constant print position by detecting this mark Black mark sensor A reflective sensor which detects the difference of potential between the black mark and print area to find the print start position Built in rewinder mode Printer mode of operation where an optional strip module is installed to take up printed media onto the build in rewinder Cut mode Printer mode of operation where an optional cutter module is installed to automatically cut media from the supply roll after they are printed The print command can specify to cut every media or to
12. 2 2 EA2 1 APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE 1 APPENDIX 4 PRINT 4 1 GLOSSARIES INDEX This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures CAUTION 1 This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC 2 The contents of this manual may be changed without notification 3 Please refer to your local Authorised Service representative with regard to any queries you may have in this manual 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 1 1 Introduction 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing the TEC B SXST series thermal printer This Owner s Manual contains from general set up through how to confirm the printer operation using a test print and should be read carefully to help gain maximum performance and life from your printer For most queries please refer to this manual and keep it safe for future reference Please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative for further information concerning this manual 1 2 Features This printer has the following features e The print head block can be opened providing smooth loading of media and ribbon e Various kinds of media can be used
13. 1 1 NEAR Bee cS tUm 1 2 OOo 1 2 Ako UMET TYDE m eM E 1 2 A1 3 2 Detection Area of the Transmissive EA1 3 A1 3 3 Detection Area of the Reflective EA1 4 A1 3 4 Effective Print 8 80080 EA1 4 R aM CHEER eee Ay CO ee EA1 5 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND EA2 1 APPENDIX 3 INTER A CE k 5 2 1 APPENDIX 4 PRINT 2 2 4 1 GLOSSARIES INDEX This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures CAUTION 1 This manual may not be copied in whole or in without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC 2 contents of this manual may be changed without notification 3 Please refer to your local Authorised Service representative with regard to any queries you may have in this manual 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ENGLISH VERSION EO1 330
14. Timing Belt 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 4 STEPPING MOTOR 5 Remove the four SMW 4x8 screws to detach the stepping motor from the motor bracket SMW 4x8 Screw Motor Bracket SMW 4x8 Screw Stepping Motor 6 Replace the stepping motor with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e Place the stepping motor so that the harness faces the Main PC board e When reassembling the stepping motor place the two timing belts around the pulley so that the partition is positioned between two belts e The screw holes to attach the stepping motor are shaped oval which allows you to adjust the attaching position Hold down the tension gauge onto the stepping motor at 3kg force and secure it with the two SMW 4x8 screws Partition Timing Belt le Screw Hole Pulley SMW 4x8 Screw Stepping Motor 10 8 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 5 RIBBON MOTORS TAKE UP FEED 10 5 RIBBON MOTORS TAKE UP FEED 10 5 1 Ribbon Motor Take up 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Remove the ribbon motor take up harness from CN13 on the Main PC board and the cable clamp Main PC Board Ribbon Motor Take up Harness 3 Remove the two SMW 3x6 screws to detach the ribbon motor take up SMW 3x6 Screw Ribbon Motor Take up 10 9 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 5
15. ET 2 1 22 Procedure before ence butt tudes oleate at E2 2 2 9 FING INC Fan FICK toits unos vas tob 2 2 2 4 Connecting the Cables to Your E2 3 2 5 Gonnecting the PoWer s coe o adu Su vens E2 4 2 6 Loring ONOFF E2 5 AUR Cte EID ose Gast base dann 2 5 2 5 2 Te P AUC Ee DERE Eoo EE auntie eee 2 5 27 Loading ANE INICCIA 2 6 2 8 MOAGING Ine RIDHO M con tue ies dc ob balck 2 12 2 9 Inserting the Optional PCMCIA E2 14 2 10 Ad 2 15 HR 1 ELT EE E3 1 2 Cl m 2 34 DUNN ModE ecc E3 3 MAINTENANCE
16. ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 3 2 Operation 3 2 Operation 3 3 Reset NOTE If the RESTART key is held for less than 3 seconds when the printer 15 in an error or pause state the printer restarts printing However when a communication error or command error occurs the printer returns to an idle condition When the printer is turned on the ON LINE message appears on the LCD Message Display It is shown during standby or normal printing 1 The printer is turned on standing by or printing ON LINE BS 1 2 If any error occurs during printing an error message appears The printer stops printing automatically The number on the right side shows the remaining number of media to be printed NO PAPER 125 V1 0A 3 To clear the error press the RESTART key The printer resumes printing ON LINE Bond V1 0A 4 If the PAUSE key is pressed during printing the printer stops printing temporarily The number on the right side shows the remaining number of media to be printed PAUSE B SX5T 1 5 When the RESTART key is pressed printer resumes printing ON LINE BESAT A reset operation clears print data sent from computer to printer and returns the printer to an idle condition 1 The printer is turned on standing by or printing ON LINE BESAT V1 0A 2 To stop printing or clear the data sent from the compute
17. 0 MSI WI 12345678903 CODE39 Standard ABCDEFGTI2SAF LM 13 EAN13 EAN13 2 digits 7801230456 456786 CODE128 CDEFGHI CODE93 ABCabc1253 C UPC E 5 digits 23 014123456 5 EANS 5 digits 4940 0458 UPC A 2 digits 12345 67890 8 5 B 12345 ll EA4 2 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES Cont UPC A 5 digits ll 12345 45 67 TEM 5 890 Industrial 2 of 5 1234569 Customer bar code T J KIX Code RSS 14 RSS 14 Stacked Omnidirectional Data Matrix UCC EAN128 00 0 0017457 POSTNET 174015906 Customer bar code of high priority RM4SCC ag tg aff RSS 14 Stacked Tt
18. BK 0 RBN Bk 0 18 IX ADJ 0 0mm 19 THRESHOLD 1 0V 20 THRESHOLD 1 4V 21 FONT PC 850 0 22 SPEED 9600 23 IDATALENG 8 24 STOP BIT 1 25 PARITY EVEN 26 CONTROL XON READY AUTO 27 MESSAGE ENGLISH 28 FORWARD WAIT ON 0 0mm 29 CUT RWD OFF 30 RIBBON SAVE ON 31 CODE AUTO 32 PEEL OFF STATUS ON 33 FEED KEY FEED 34 KANUJI TYPE1 35 EURO CODE BO 36 AUTO HD CHK OFF 37 ACK BUSY TYPE1 38 WEB PRINTER OFF 39 INPUT PRIME ON 40 NEAR END OFF 41 JEX I O MODE TYPE1 42 ICENTRO MODE SPP 43 PLUG amp PLAY OFF 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 44 LABEL END TYPE1 45 PRE PEEL OFF OFF 46 BACK SPEED STD 47 PRTR IP ADDRESS 192 168 010 020 48 GATE IP ADDRESS 000 000 000 000 49 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 000 50 TTF AREA 640KB 51 EXT CHR AREA 128KB 52 BASIC AREA 64KB 53 IPC SAVE AREA 64KB 54 SOCKET PORT OFF 08000 55 BASIC OFF 56 BASIC TRACE OFF 57 DHCP OFF 58 DHCP ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFF 59 ESS ID SymbolAP 60 INFRASTRUCTURE 61 CHANNEL 01 62 OPEN SYSTEM 63 WEP OFF 64 WEP TYPE 40bit 65 SEND KEY 1 66 KEY 1 101112131415161718191 1 1 67 2 2021222324252627282
19. Errors such as paper end and cutter error are not detected during paper feed Selecting the Transmissive Sensor for pre printed labels within software commands allows the printer to detect the proper print start position correctly even when using pre printed labels 6 If the printer continued to print out of position after setting the threshold adjust the Feed Gap Sensor in the system mode Reset the threshold again Make sure that the Transmissive Sensor for pre printed labels is selected in the feed and issue commanas lox 6 6 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 2 6 2 RESET Reset operation clears the print data sent to the printer from computer and returns the printer to idle condition 1 The printer is turned on standing by or printing ON LINE B SX4T VX x To stop printing or clear the data sent from the computer press the PAUSE key The printer stops printing PAUSE 52 The number of unprinted media See NOTE 2 B SX4T VX x Press and hold the RESTART key for 3 seconds or longer lt 1 gt Press the PAUSE key The data sent from computer will be cleared and the printer returns to an idle condition ON LINE NOTES 1 If the RESTART key is held for less than 3 seconds when the printer is in an error or pause state the printer restarts printing However when a communication error or command error occurs the printer returns to an idle
20. Schallemission unter 70dB nach DIN 45635 oder ISO 7779 e Die fur das Vorgesehene Steckdose mu in der Nahe des Ger tes und leicht zug nglich sein Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corp Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation As an ENERGY STAR Partner TOSHIBA TEC has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency Outline of the International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the penetration of energy efficient computers and other office equipment The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily The targeted products are office equipment such as computers monitors printers facsimiles copiers scanners and multifunction devices Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations ENERGY STAR is a U S registered mark This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable rotection against harmful interference when the equipment is op
21. main menu screen perform Default Device setting and Default Path setting in the following procedure 1 Click on Setting on the upper left corner of the main menu screen 2 Click on Open to show the sub menu screen as shown below ih 5 Downloader setting default path CXToradoitarg eticanfigSTDBSP default drive serch Search button Default drive selection LPT1 OK button Cancel Cancel button 3 Click on the Search button to show the sub menu screen as shown below Select a directly to be required as the default path ih 5 Downloader setting Path CiTornadoitarg eticanfig aTDBSP Select button c BM PREL select cancel Drive selection Cancel button Ex B 5X OE DVWNLD 4 Click on the Select button and then the OK button The default path setting is completed This setting will be effective next time you start up Windows 7 4 7 PROGRAM DOWN LOAD EO18 33012A 7 3 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD 5 Select a device to be required as the default device and then click the OK button The default device setting is completed This setting will be effective next time you start up Windows ih 5 Downloader setting default path Filesi TOSHIBA TECIB SAIDVVAILD default drive d Default drive selection a COM OK button Cancel NOTES 1 Whe
22. 4 1 4 1 4 1 1 Printhead Paten Senso 4 1 41 2 and Panels 4 2 4 1 3 Optional Gutter Mod l ev se etico SU c ex E4 2 42 Care Handling of the Media and E4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING a cosa D oto vu ve aara a a E5 1 s MEE dice E5 1 5 2 JPOSSIDIO DrIODIOITIS peas qute RR aS E5 2 5 3 emovitidxatimedMeGOIS dete dei ep tini deoa be eta ium Pais eru s ei dotes E5 3 SP E SE IET E5 4 ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2052202 2 1 1 T O 1 1 AT 2 O DHOlIS me ee EA1 2 MR ERNEUT esl ESA EA1 2 Ako T Meda Type E EA1 2 A1 3 2 Detection Area of the Transmissive EA1 3 A1 3 3 Detection Area of the Reflective Sensor EA1 4 A1 3 4 Effective Print 88888 EA1 4 AM illas NTC a oe EA1 5 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS
23. Enter each digit of the port number with the RESTART or FEED key RESTART PORT ON 98000 PAUSE PORT ON 58000 Y PORT ON 08000 FEED PORT ON 08000 PORT ON 08000 Enter the 5th digit of the port number with the PAUSE RESTART or FEED key Pressing the Y PAUSE key allows the 4th digit setting lt 7 gt 1 ADDRESS Repeat this procedure until the 1 digit setting has been completed 5 59 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 9 IP ADDRESS SETTING 3 DHCP and DHCP ID Settings To set the DHCP and the DHCP ID follow the procedure below lt gt 1 ADDRESS DHCP PAUSE DHCP setting lt 7 gt 1 ADDRESS Select DHCP ON or DHCP OFF with the FEED ae or RESTART key lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS DHCP ON FEED DHCP DHCP is available PAUSE Select ON or OFF with the FEED or RESTART DHCP is unavailable ON lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS DHCP CLIENT ID PAUSE DHCP ID entering mode setting Select ASCII or HEX with the FEED RESTART key Select ASCII or HEX with the FEED or RESTART key FEED MODE HEX MODE ASCII DHCP CLIENT ID RESTART MODE ASCII MODE HEX DHCP CLIENT ZEB PAUSE DHCP ID setting Set the ID from 1st byte to 16th byte NOTE HEX mode is used here For ASCII mode data of each byte will be showed in ASCII characters Enter the numeric values for each byte 1st byte to 16th byte with
24. Expansion I O interface An interface circuit that may be installed into printer to allow the printer to be connected to an external device such as a wrapping machine and to receive feed print start and pause signals from the external device and to send back print pause and error status signals to the external device Feed gap sensor A transmissive sensor which detects the difference of potential between the gap between labels and the label to find the print position of the label Font A complete set of alphanumeric characters in one style of type E g Helvetica Courier Times Gap Clearance between labels IPS Inch per second The unit used to express print speed Label A type of media with adhesive backing LCD Liquid Crystal Display Installed on the operation panel and displays Operation modes error message and so on Media Material on which data is printed by the printer Label tag paper fanfold paper perforated paper etc PCMCIA interface An optional interface circuit that may be installed into the printer to allow the use of the small credit card sized PC cards such as flash memory cards and LAN cards PCMCIA is the acronym for Personal Computer Memory Card International Association GLOSSARIES Pre printed media A type of media on which characters logos and other designs have been already printed Print head element The thermal print head consists of a single line of tiny resistive el
25. Fit the positioning tabs of the ribbon motor feed into the positioning holes of the ribbon motor block Apply FLOIL G 488 to the pulley using a soft cloth Place the ribbon motor feed so that the harness faces the Main PC board Ribbon Motor Block Positioning Tab Pulley Positioning Hole Ribbon Motor Feed 5 Refer to Section 5 5 6 to fine adjust the ribbon motor voltage 10 12 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 6 RIBBON MOTOR SENSORS TAKE UP FEED 10 6 RIBBON MOTOR SENSORS TAKE UP FEED 10 6 1 Ribbon Motor Sensor Take up 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Disconnect the sensor harness from the ribbon motor sensor ass y take up NOTE The other end of the sensor harness is connected to CN51 on the Main PC board 3 Remove the SMW 3x6 screw to detach the ribbon motor sensor ass y take up Ribbon Motor Sensor Ass y Take up SMW 3x6 Screw Sensor Harness 4 Detach the ribbon motor sensor take up from the ribbon sensor plate take up in the following steps NOTE The ribbon motor sensor take up is attached to the plate with the four hooks 1 Pull the ribbon motor sensor take up in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the two hooks on the connector side 2 Move the ribbon motor sensor take up in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the other hooks 3 Detach the ribbon motor sensor take up from the plate
26. 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 6 TEST PRINT Sensor Type Selection Select the sensor type among TRANS Feed Gap Sensor REFLECT Black Mark Sensor and NONE lt 4 gt TEST PRINT SENSOR TRANS SENSOR NONE None RESTART SENSOR REFLECT Black Mark Sensor FEED SENSOR TRANS Feed Gap Sensor After selecting the sensor type press the PAUSE key to go to Printing Mode Selection NOTE Select the sensor type which is proper to the media being used Basically the Reflective Sensor Black Mark Sensor is for tag paper and the Transmissive Sensor Feed Gap Sensor is for label Printing Mode Selection Select the printing mode for the test print between TRANSFR Thermal transfer and DIRECT Thermal direct A TEST PRINT PRI TRANSER RESTART PRI Thermal Transfer FEED PRT DERE Thermal Direct After selecting the printing mode press the PAUSE key to go to Issue Mode Selection NOTE Select the printing mode which is proper to the operating conditions Basically the Thermal Transfer is for the use of ribbon and the Thermal Direct is for the use of thermal paper Issue Mode Selection Select the issue mode for the test print among S NO CUT Batch mode without cut C WITH CUT Cut mode and H JPEEL OFF Strip mode lt A gt TEST PRINT TEPEL ING GUT Batch mode without cut RESTART MET Dn CUT
27. For best results and longer printer life use only TOSHIBA TEC recommended media and ribbons Store the media and ribbons in accordance with their specifications This printer mechanism contains high voltage components therefore you should never remove any of the covers of the machine as you may receive an electrical shock Additionally the printer contains many delicate components that may be damaged if accessed by unauthorised personnel Clean the outside of the printer with a clean dry cloth or a clean cloth slightly dampened with a mild detergent solution Use caution when cleaning the thermal print head as it may become very hot while printing Wait until it has had time to cool before cleaning Use only the TOSHIBA TEC recommended print head cleaner to clean the print head Do not turn off the printer power or remove the power plug while the printer 15 printing or while the ON LINE lamp is blinking E2 1 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 2 Procedure before Operation 2 2 Procedure before Operation NOTE To communicate with the host computer one of the following cables is required 1 RS 232C cable 25 pins 2 Centronics cable 36 pins 3 USB B plug Option 4 LAN 10 Base T or 100 Base TX Option 2 3 Fitting the Fan Filter This section describes the outline of the printer setup 10 11 Unpack the accessories and printer from the box Refer to Safety Precautions
28. I When issuing a label using the swing cutter label length should be 35 0 mm Gap length 2 When marking black marks on the label rolls they should be marked at the gaps On the fly issue means that the printer can feed and print without stopping between labels There are restrictions in use of the media which is narrower than 50 mm For details refer to TOSHIBA TEC service representative A1 3 2 Detection Area of the Transmissive Sensor The Transmissive Sensor is movable from the centre to the left edge of media The Transmissive Sensor detects a gap between labels as illustrated below Label Area to be detected Centre of media Sensor position Print side Min 2 0 mm Label Min 6 0 mm when using Gap Label the cutter module Min 12 mm Media feed direction Sensor is movable within this range EA1 3 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 A1 3 Media A1 3 2 Detection Area of the Transmissive Sensor Cont Tag paper with square holes Centre of media Sensor position Print side gt Square holes Round holes are not acceptable Media feed direction Sensor is movable within this range NOTE Round holes are not acceptable A1 3 3 Detection Area of the Reflective Sensor The Reflective Sensor is movable from the centre to the left edge of media The reflection factor of the Black Mark must be 10 or lower with a waveform length of 950 nm
29. Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART Available After selecting the Input Prime press the PAUSE key 5 4 21 Ribbon Near End Selection With this parameter you can select the value to be detected the ribbon near end When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 20 times lt 27 PARAMETER RBN NEAR END 70m Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RBN NEAR END 70m 1 is detected when the remains of the ribbon is RESTART ong RBN NEAR END 30m Near end is detected when the remains of the ribbon is 30m long RBN NEAR END OFF Near end is not detected After selecting the Ribbon Near End press the PAUSE key FEED NOTE There may be some variances in ribbon near end detection 5 4 22 Expansion I O Interface Selection With this parameter you can select Type of the Expansion I O interface operating mode When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 21 times EAS FO PEL Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART TYPE1 Standard mode FEED TYPE2 Inline mode After selecting the Expansion Interface press the PAUSE key 5 30 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 23 Centronics Interface S
30. 6 Fit the bush to the harness in the orientation as shown below Bush Harness Ass y 4 8 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 2 ROTARY CUTTER B 8204 QM 7 Insert the harness assY into the hole in the main frame Fit the bush into the hole Main Frame Hole Harness Ass y 8 Connect the 9 pin connector of the harness ass y to CN15 and 2 pin connector to CN18 on the Main PC board respectively CN15 9pins X CN18 2 pins Main PC Board Harness Ass y 9 Open the printer block Refer to section 3 3 10 Connect the four harnesses of the cutter unit to CN8 CN10 CN11 and CN12 on the cutter drive unit Print Head Block Cutter Drive Unit CN8 CN12 CN10 Cutter Unit CN11 4 9 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 18 33012 4 2 ROTARY CUTTER B 8204 QM 11 Fit the two tabs of the cutter drive unit into the notches and then fix the cutter unit with the three 5 4 screws Cutter Unit Notch 12 Attach the cutter cover to the cutter unit with the two screws so that the tab of the cutter cover turns on the cutter cover open switch NOTES 1 Be careful not to pinch the cutter harness by the cutter cover 2 Make sure that the anti static brush is protruding from the media outlet Cutter Cover Open Switch Cutter Cover a Anti static Brush 2588 B E Cutter Cover Media O
31. Ensure the printer 15 operated a level surface Any data stored in the memory of the printer could be lost during a printer fault Try to avoid using this equipment on the same power supply as high voltage equipment or equipment likely to cause mains interference Unplug the machine whenever you are working inside it or cleaning it Keep your work environment static free Do not place heavy objects on top of the machines as these items may become unbalanced and fall causing injury Do not block the ventilation slits of the machines as this will cause heat to build up inside the machines and may cause fire Do not lean against the machine It may fall on you and could cause injury Care must be taken not to injure yourself with the printer paper cutter Unplug the machine when it is not used for a long period of time Place the machine on a stable and level surface Request Regarding Maintenance Utilize our maintenance services After purchasing the machine contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance once a year to have the inside of the machine cleaned Otherwise dust will build up inside the machines and may cause a fire or a malfunction Cleaning is particularly effective before humid rainy seasons preventive maintenance service performs the periodic checks and other work required to maintain the quality and performance of the machines preventing accidents beforehand For details please consult your
32. Feed Gap Sensor Label Media Sensor Locking Screw Setting Black Mark Sensor position 1 Remove the Locking Screw that secures the Media Sensor 2 Pull about 500 mm of media out of the front of the printer turn the media back on itself and feed it under the Print Head past the sensor so that the black mark can be seen from above 3 Manually move the Media Sensor so that the Black Mark Sensor is in line with the centre of the black mark on the media 44 indicates the position of the Black Mark Sensor 4 Tighten the Locking Screw Black Mark Sensor EN a Media Sensor Locking Screw 2 8 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 2 7 Loading the Media 2 7 Loading the Media 12 There are four issue modes available on this printer How to set the Co nt media for each mode is provided below Batch mode In the batch mode the media is continuously printed and fed until the number of labels tags specified in the issue command have been printed NOTES Strip mode Be sure to set the Selection In the strip mode the backing paper is automatically removed from the Switch to STANDARD label at the Strip Plate as each label is printed PEEL OFF position The backing paper is easier 1 Remove enough labels from the leading edge of the media to leave to feed back to the Take Up 500mm of backing paper free Spool if the Front Plate is 2 Insert the backing paper und
33. QP Europe Bloc Machine Type 0 Standard 2 Including the ribbon saving module strip module and expansion I O PC board Machine Version Issue mode S Batch Resolution G 8 dots mm 12 dots mm Printing method Thermal direct or Thermal transfer Printing width 4 4 inches 5 5 inches 1 OUTLINE EO10 33013A 1 8 APPEARANCE AND DIMENSIONS APPROXIMATE 1 3 APPEARANCE AND DIMENSIONS APPROXIMATE 1 3 1 Front View Rear View Front View Top Cover LCD Message Display Operation Panel Media Outlet 1 3 2 Operation Panel LCD Message Display POWER LED Green ON LINE LED Green ERROR LED Red FEED key RESTART key PAUSE key 1 3 3 Dimensions Approximate Standard With cutter module Supply Window Serial Interface Connector RS 232C Rear View PCMCIA Card Slot Option USB Connector Option or LAN Connector Option Parallel Interface Connector Centronics USB Connector Option or LAN Connector Option Expansion I O Interface Connector B SX4T Option Power Switch O OFF ON AC Power Inlet LCD Message Display When the power is turned on and it is ready to print ON LINE is displayed POWER LED Green Lights when the power is turned on ON LINE LED Green 1 Flashes when communicating with a host PC 2 Lights while printing ERROR LED Red Lights when the printer does not operate correctly FEED key Feeds paper RESTART key Res
34. TEC Thermal Printer B SXAT SX5T SERIES CEST Document No EO0 33013AUM Original Jan 2003 Revised Feb 2003 TABLE OF CONTENTS B SX4T OWNER S 1 33034 5 5 5 MANUAL 1 33036 PRODUCT EO10 33013A MAINTENANCE MANUAL EO18 33012A TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION Precaution This service manual is intended for use by service technicians and designed as a guide for repair amp maintenance The manual is intended to promote smooth service operations of the product in the market place It is not intended for any other purpose such as development or product specifications For questions regarding development or product specifications please contact the TOSHIBA TEC department in charge This manual may be changed or revised without notice If you find any misprints or omissions please contact the TOSHIBA TEC Service Dept Ohito promptly Facsimile No 0558 76 9842 TOSHIBA TEC cannot be held responsible for any trouble which have been caused by misprints or omissions The following related manuals contain additional specific information on using B SX4T SX5T SEHIES and can be referred to for more detailed information available from TOSHIBA TEC sales headquarters Interface Communication Manual Supply Manual Specifications Safety Summary Persona
35. The Reflective Sensor should be aligned with the centre of the Black Mark Centre of media Min 2 0 mm aes gt Detecting the black marks on the back Min 12 mm Sensor should be positioned at the centre of the black mark Media feed direction 1 Sensor is movable within this range A1 3 4 Effective Print Area The figure below illustrates the relation between the head effective print width and media width Out of print range 71 of print range ae Aaa I 6 0 128 0 mm 0 2 6 0 mm Head Effective Print Range 140 mm Max media width EA1 4 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 A1 4 Ribbon A1 3 4 Effective Print Area Cont The figure below shows the effective print area on the media Area to be detected Start line Media height 10 1500 mm 1 5 mm from the left edge of media 1 5 mm from the right edge of media J Media feed direction Area to be detected Media width backing paper width is not included NOTES Be sure not to print on the 1 5 wide area from the media edges shaded area in the above figure Printing this area may cause ribbon wrinkles resulting in a poor print quality of the guaranteed print area The centre of media is positioned at the centre of the Print Head Print quality in the 3 mm area from the print head stop position including 1 non printable area for print speed slow down is not
36. is selected the printer starts printing without print start position adjustment If the print start position adjustment is unnecessary you can save the media by selecting PAPER NO FEED 5 46 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 6 TEST PRINT 5 6 2 Test Print Pattern Selection When lt 4 gt TEST PRINT appears after paper feed selection press the PAUSE key PRINT PRINT CONDITION Select a test print pattern from the following options PRINT CONDITION RESTART FEED FACTORY TEST gt gt 227 UJ N N D gt I 20 gt gt gt CO 29 go D gt 4 0 JI CZ AJ 20 rH FT1 22 re rH 22 22 20 22 22 rH N m FT1 22 gt 9 GO gt m gt 9 CZ gt D D m as 5 6 3 Slant Line 1 dot SLANT LINECIDOT While selecting the Slant Line 1 dot press the PAUSE key to start printing the slant line patterns 1 dot After printing is completed the display returns to lt 4 gt TEST PRINT Pressing the PAUSE key causes the display to show SLANT LINE 1DOT again Then press the FEED key Print Sample of Slant Line 1 dot Magnified view Black area ratio 16 6 5 47 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 6 TEST PRINT 5 6 4 Slant Line 3 dots SLANT LINE C3DOT While selecting the Slant Line 3 dots press the PAUSE key to sta
37. lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x NORMAL END If there is a problem with the print head the following message is displayed lt 1 gt DIAG AXcX HEAD ERROR Press the PAUSE key to return to lt 1 gt DIAG NOTES 1 Make sure that the Top Cover is closed before starting the print head check 2 If HEAD ERROR appears the print head element be damaged Replace the print head 3 print head element check be performed at the power on time For selecting this function refer to Section 5 4 Parameter Setting 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING Outline of Parameter Setting In the Parameter Setting mode various kinds of parameters such as communication key LCD etc can be set This will allow the use of the printer to comply with your operating conditions The Parameter Setting menu contains the following lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET PAUSE lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FONT CODE 850 Character code selection lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET KANJI CODE TYPEI FEED Kanji code selection RESTART FEED lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET RESTART ZERO FONT 0 Zero font code selection lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Euro code selection FEED RESTART EURO CODE BO 1 FEED lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET RESTART SPEED 9600bps Baud rate selection lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED RESTART AUTO HD CHK OFF Auto print head check s
38. two SM 4x8 screws keeping the solenoid in contact with the spacer Plunger Head Up Arm Solenoid SM 4x8 Screw Frame 6 Attach the cable clamp to the frame of the printer Fix the solenoid cable with this cable clamp Cable Clamp Solenoid Cable Solenoid Harness Solenoid NOTE Be careful not to snag the solenoid harness when running it 4 18 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 18 33012 4 4 RIBBON SAVING MODULE B 9904 R QM 7 Connect the solenoid harness to CN1 on the RSV PC board and CN11 on the Main PC board Pass the solenoid harness through the cut 8 Connect the solenoid cable to CN2 on the RSV PC board Main PC Board Solenoid Harness Cut CN1 Solenoid Cable 9 After attaching the solenoid reassemble the operation panel ass y and the side panel L in the reverse order of removal NOTE Perform lt 9 gt FOR FACTORY of system mode to make sure the solenoid performs properly 4 19 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 5 PCMCIA INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 PCM QM 4 5 PCMCIA INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 PCM QM This optional interface board is provided with the two slots which allows for the use of the two TYPE II PC cards However it is not applied to TYPE III PC cards CAUTION 1 Loosen the two M 8x5 screws of the PCMCIA interface board before installing it Failure to do this may cause damage to the connector M 3x5 Screw 2 When using the L
39. KEY O J Threshold manual fine adjustment for the black mark sensor Threshold manual fine adjustment for the feed gap sensor X axis fine adjustment Character code and zero font code PC 850 0 without slash Control code Baud rate Data length Stop bit Parity Transmission control code QP JA XON READY AUTO Forward wait Feed key function Kanji code type Euro code Auto print head check Web printer function Status response Label pitch Effective print length Effective print width 104 0 mm B SX4T 128 0 mm B SX5T Printing mode Thermal transfer ensor type Feed gap sensor Print speed 6 sec B SX4T 5 B SX5T Issue mode Batch print PC save automatic calling ON Save No on the Main PCB ID No 01 TYPE 1 QQ QP English JA Japanese Head up OFF Rewinder OFF ACK BUSY timing LCD message language Head up in cut mode Rewinder selection Ribbon saving module QQ QP OFF JA ON otrip wait status OFF Input prime Reset operation when INIT signal is ON ON Available Ribbon near end detect OFF No detection Expansion I O mode TYPE1 Standard mode Centronics mode SPP Compatible mode Plug amp Play OFF Print processing at the label end detection TYPE1 Printing is paused while the label is issued OFF Unavailable SID 3 inches second OFF Unavailable OFF Unavailable OFF Unavailable Pre strip Back feed speed Basic interpreter Basic interpreter trace DHCP function NOTE The initial va
40. Media 2 6 4 3 A1 2 Media length A1 3 Media pitch A 1 3 Media sensor 2 8 O ON LINE LED 1 4 3 1 Operation Panel 1 3 1 4 3 1 Parallel interface 1 3 Parallel port 2 3 PAUSE key 1 4 3 1 PCMCIA card 2 12 PCMCIA interface board 2 12 1 2 Platen 1 4 4 1 Power consumption AI 1 Power cord 1 2 2 4 POWER LED 1 4 3 1 Power switch 1 3 2 4 2 5 Pre printed media 4 3 5 4 Print head 1 4 4 1 Print head block 1 4 Printing method AI 1 Printing speed 1 1 R Reflective sensor 2 13 Al 4 Resolution 1 1 RESTART key 1 4 3 1 Ribbon 2 11 4 3 A1 5 Ribbon shaft 1 4 2 11 Ribbon stopper 1 4 2 11 Ribbon width 1 5 Rotation 1 1 RS 232C 1 3 2 3 A3 1 INDEX ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 INDEX S Serial interface 1 3 Strip mode 2 9 Strip module 2 9 1 2 Supply voltage 1 1 T Tag AI 2 Test print 2 13 Thermal direct 2 13 Al 1 Thermal transfer 2 13 1 1 Threshold setting 5 4 Transmissive sensor 2 13 A1 3 Two dimensional code 1 1 U USB interface 1 3 2 3 1 2 Weight 1 0 33015 SUPPLEMENT FOR 5 MANUAL TEC B SX4T and B SX5T SERIES This supplement is applicable to the following Owner s Manuals 5 4 Series EO1 33034 B SX5T Series 1 33036 Precautions for using the Ribbon Saving Function The ribbon saving module is standard on the B SX5T series but not on the B SX4T series Also the ribbon saving function has been set to off by
41. Refer to Section 10 11 1 Attach the media sensor upper to the pinch roller block with the two TT 3x5 screws Refer to Section 10 1 1 1 Attach the side panel L to the printer Perform a sensor adjustment in System mode Perform a test print Make sure that printing was performed correctly 0 Refer to Sections 5 5 7 and 6 1 to adjust the feed gap black mark sensor N 1 10 31 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 12 HEAD UP SENSOR 10 12 HEAD UP SENSOR 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Remove the operation panel Refer to Section 3 4 3 Disconnect the sensor harness from the head up sensor ass Y Head Up Sensor Ass y Sensor Harness 4 Remove the SMW 3x6 screw to detach the head up sensor ass y from the printer Head Up Sensor Ass y SMW 3x6 Screw 10 32 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 12 HEAD UP SENSOR 5 Detach the head up sensor from the head up sensor plate in the following steps NOTE The head up sensor is attached to the plate with the four hooks 1 Pull the head up sensor in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the two hooks on the connector side 2 Move the head up sensor in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the other hooks 3 Detach the head up sensor from the plate Head Up Sensor Plate Hook Head Up Sensor 6 Replace the head up sensor with a new one then reassemble in the reve
42. Ribbon is not rewound or fed smoothly Media is not set properly Poor media quality Improper adjustment of the feed gap sensor or black mark sensor Threshold is improper Failure of the feed gap sensor or black mark sensor The cutter mechanism is not installed properly Failure of the stepping motor Failure of the communication cable Failure of the RS 232C connector Failure of the communication connector Failure of the PC or application software Failure of the MAIN PC board Use only TOSHIBA TEC approved ribbon Replace the ribbon rewind motor ribbon feed motor oet the media properly Use the media approved by TOSHIBA TEC He adjust the sensor Set the threshold correctly Replace the feed gap sensor or black mark sensor Install the cutter module properly the stepping motor or MAIN PC board Replace the cable Replace the connector Replace the connector Modify the program Replace the MAIN PC board 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord before replacing the main parts NOTE to disconnect all cables of the printer from the PC and the option devices Never remove the screws fixing the printer block See Caution in Section 3 10 1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Disconnect the power supply harnes
43. SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 6 times to enter the Ribbon Motor Voltage Fine Adjustment Take up Motor menu lt 3 gt ADJUST SET RBN ADJ lt FW gt 0 Take up Motor To change the screen to the Ribbon Motor Voltage Fine Adjustment Feed Motor press the FEED key again REN ADJ lt BK gt 0 When the LCD display shows RBN ADJ lt FW gt or ADJ lt BK gt press the PAUSE key to start And then use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option Take up Motor Feed Motor ADJ lt FW gt 0 RBN ADJ lt BK gt 0 RESTART RBN ADJ lt FW gt ADJ lt BK gt 1 ADJ lt FW gt 2 RBN ADJ lt BK gt 2 1 FEED RBN ADJ lt FW gt 14 RBN ADJ lt BK gt 14 RBN ADJ lt FW gt 15 RBN ADJ lt BK gt 15 FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 1 step change up to 15 steps RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 1 step change up to 0 steps After completing the fine adjustment press the PAUSE key NOTES 1 The fine adjustment value equals to the sum of the fine adjustment values set by the PC command and this parameter The maximum ribbon motor voltage fine adjustment value is 15 When the value reached the maximum the value remains unchanged even if the subsequent fine adjustment is performed 2 One step corresponds to 5 of the standard voltage and up to 75 of the voltage can be decreased 3 Please make this adjustmen
44. The Ribbon Sensor is mounted 2 8 Loading the Ribbon There are two types of media available for printing on these are thermal transfer media and direct thermal media a chemically treated surface V 2 DO NOT LOAD a ribbon when using direct thermal media 1 Rotate the Ribbon Stoppers counterclockwise by 90 and move them back to the end of the Ribbon Shafts Restore the Ribbon Stoppers to the former orientation by turning them clockwise parts To reduce the risk of fingers jewellery clothing etc being drawn into the moving parts be sure to load the ribbon once the printer has stopped moving completely The print head becomes hot immediately after printing Allow it to cool before loading the ribbon To avoid injury be careful not to trap your fingers while opening or closing Ribbon Stopper Ribbon Shaft the cover 2 Leaving plenty of slack between the ribbon spools place the ribbon onto the Ribbon Shafts as shown below CAUTION Ribbon Shaft NOTES Ribbon Take up Roll the ribbon when printing Printing with a wrinkled 3 Slide the Ri long the Ri ition wh Slide the Ribbon Stoppers along the Ribbon Shafts a position where the ribbon is centred when fitted quality 4 Lower the Print Head Block and set the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate aligning its holes with the Ribbon Shafts Take up any slack in the ribbon Wind the leading tape onto the ribbon take up roll until the i
45. cause fire or electric shock If the machines are dropped or their cabinets damaged first turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet and then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Continued use of the machine in that condition may cause fire or electric shock Do not plug in or unplug the power cord plug with wet hands as this may cause electric shock Do not place metal objects or water filled containers such as flower vases flower pots or mugs etc on top of the machines If metal objects or spilled liquid enter the machines this may cause fire or electric shock Do not scratch damage or modify the power cords Also do not place heavy objects on pull on or excessively bend the cords as this may cause fire or electrical shock Continued use of the machines in an abnormal condition such as when the machines are producing smoke or strange smells may cause fire or electric shock In these cases immediately turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet Then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Safety Summary Disconnect Connect a grounding wire If foreign objects metal fragments water liquids enter the machines first turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet and then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assi
46. up to 99 5 mm RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 0 5mm change to 99 5 mm After completing the fine adjustment press the PAUSE key X Axis Fine Adjustment Example Top Feed Direction Down Printing _ X Y 0 0 mm ABC 50 0 Bottom TP First Printing 50 0 mm 50 0 mm 50 0 mm 5 38 5 SYSTEM MODE NOTES 1 A Q 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT The X Axis fine adjustment is performed to fine adjust the print position in horizontal direction left or right Adjust the X axis within the effective print range After the value reaches the coordinate 0 the value remains unchanged even if the subsequent fine adjustment is performed in the negative direction This adjustment cannot be used in the Self Test mode or Test print The fine adjustment value equals to the sum of the fine adjustment values set by the PC command and this parameter The maximum X axis fine adjustment value is 99 5mm When the value reached the maximum the value remains unchanged even If the subsequent fine adjustment is performed 5 5 5 Print Tone Fine Adjustment Thermal Transfer Thermal Direct Print With this parameter you can fine adjust the Print Tone When lt 3 gt ADJUST SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 4 times to enter the Print Tone Fine Adjustment Thermal transfer print menu SOPADJUST SEL Thermal Transfer TONE A
47. 1 gt DIAG Vx x FEED RESTART Y lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED RESTART lt S7 ADJUST SET FEED RESTART Y lt 4 gt TEST PRINT FEED RESTART Y lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ FEED RESTART lt 6 gt CLEAR FEED RESTART Y ADDRESS FEED RESTART lt 8 gt BASIC FEED RESTART lt 9 gt FOR FACTORY FEED This is the start of the Parameter Setting menu This is the start of the Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment menu This is the start of the Test Print menu This is the start of the Sensor Adjustment menu This is the start of the RAM Clear menu This is the start of the IP Address Setting menu This is the start of the Basic Setting menu This is the start of the Factory Mode menu NOTES 1 System Mode menus can be selected with the RESTART or FEED key 2 Pressing the PAUSE key allows you to enter the sub menus of each System Mode menu Flowcharts of each menu s sub menus are provided on the following pages 3 X X of DIAG Vx x indicates firmware version and revision 5 2 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST Outline of Self Diagnostic Test In the Self Diagnostic Test mode the printer checks and prints out the printer system information such as the sensor or interface and the Maintenance Counter Also it makes the print head broken element check The Self Diagnostic T
48. 10 6 RIBBON MOTOR SENSORS TAKE UP FEED 10 13 10 6 1 Ribbon Motor Sensor Take Up 10 13 10 6 2 Ribbon Motor Sensor Feed 10 15 10 7 PRINT HEAD 10 17 10 8 PELATEN 10 20 10 9 FEED 10 22 10 10 PINCH ROLLER ASS Y 10 24 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER 10 26 10 11 1 Removing the Media Sensor Ass y 10 26 10 11 2 Replacing the Media Sensor 10 28 10 11 3 Replacing the Media Sensor Lower 10 29 18 33012 10 11 4 Reassembling the Media Sensor Ass 10 30 10 12 HEAD UP 5 10 32 10 13 PRINTER OPEN
49. 952 1380 1400 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 9 Expansion Interface Check Loopback test OK The circuit has no problem NG The circuit has a problem or loopback jig is not attached Expansion PC board Connect the jig like below to the Expansion I O PC board s connector and perform a loop back check ns a ns se vr se 20 22 24 300 ohms Connector FCN 781P024 G P 10 Internal Serial Interface Check EX 232C NG OK The circuit has no problem NG The circuit has a problem or loopback jig is not attached Internal Serial Interface Connect the jig like below to the serial interface connector and perform a loop back check Connector DF3 8S 2C Contact DF3 2428SCF 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 5 3 5 Print Head Element Check When the Self Diagnostic Test result is printed the message returns to lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Press the PAUSE key three times and FEED key twice The printer is ready to check the print head to see if there is any problem with the print head Press the PAUSE key to start lt I DIAG HEAD CHECK The printer starts checking the print head lt 1 gt DIAG CHECKING If there is no problem with the print head the print head check is complete Press the PAUSE key to return to lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x
50. Adjustment with ribbon PAUSE 5 51 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 7 SENSOR ADJUSTMENT NOTES Perform a sensor threshold setting after changing the media to a different type 2 An error related to the print position may be caused by the improperly set sensor threshold In this case please perform a threshold setting in this mode In case further adjustment is required refer to Section 5 5 Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment to make the threshold fine adjustment 3 When pressing the FEED and RESTART keys at the same time in the Sensor Adjustment menu the display returns to lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ 4 The sensor status is checked every 200 msec Therefore the display may change according to the status While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Message appears lt 1 gt DIAG Press the FEED key 4 times The printer is at the start of the Sensor Adjustment menu lt S gt SENSOR ADU 5 7 1 Sensor Status Display When lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ appears press the PAUSE key to display the following lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ m Environmental Temperature Thermistor Status 0 to 86 C Print Head Temperature Thermistor Status 0 to 86 Pressing the PAUSE key again shows the following display KOP SENSOR ADU 92520 A m Heat Sink Temperature Sensor Status 25 C 80 90 C 99 C P
51. CN4 and CN15 on the Main PC board respectively Shorter Harness of the Strip Sensor Harness TR CN15 Main PC Board Li T i Pm 1 1j 107 CN4 Longer Harness of the Rewind Full Sensor TR Rewinder Harness NOTE Secure the rewinder harness and the longer harness of the rewind full sensor TR to the space under the Main PC board with the cable clamp so that they are not pinched by the covers or printer s internal components Main PC Board Cable Clamp 11 Reassemble the operation panel ass y and the expansion I O board in the reverse order of removal 4 3 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 1 SWING CUTTER B 4205 QM 4 1 SWING CUTTER B 4205 QM WARNING Be careful not to injure your fingers when installing the cutter unit a This optional device is used for cut print which cannot be used together with either 8204 9904 H QM All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below Cutter Unit 1 pc Cutter Cover 1 pc Cutter Harness 1 pc Print Head Cleaner 1 pc P No FMQB0051601 Cutter Attachment Screw Bush 1 pc 2 pcs Installation manual 1 copy e FL 4x6 Screw 1 pc 1 Remove the two black screws to detach the front plate Front Plate Black Screws NOTE Retain the two
52. ESC LF NUL ESC LF NUL mode Mainframe mode XX XX Optional code The values are given in HEX FEED Feeds one label PRINT Prints image buffer on one label 34 Kanji code type Not supported QQ QP models TYPE 1 Windows code TYPE 2 Original code 5 20H to FFH 36 Auto print head broken element check ON Available OFF Unavailable 37 Centronics interface ACK BUSY timing setting TYPE1 The timing of ACK signal going up matches with that of the release of BUSY 8 Status The timing of ACK signal going down matches with that of the release of BUSY status OFF Unavailable Reset operation when INIT signal is ON OFF Unavailable 40 Ribbon near end detect setting 30m Near end is detected when the remains of the ribbon is 30m long 70m Near end is detected when the remains of the ribbon is 70m long OFF Near end is not detected 41 Expansion I O interface operating mode TYPE1 Standard mode TYPE2 Inline mode 5 8 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST Contents 42 Centronics interface operating mode SPP Compatible mode ECP ECP mode 43 Plug amp Play setting ON Available OFF Unavailable 44 Print processing setting at the label end detection TYPE1 Printing is paused while the label is issued TYPE2 Printing is paused after the label is issued 45 Pre Strip setting ON Available OFF Unavailable 46 Bac
53. FEED After selecting the ACK BUSY timing press the PAUSE key 5 28 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING NOTE ACK BUSY Signal Timing Chart If the error occurs with the Centronics interface communication change the types 1 TYPE1 Data 1 to 8 Host Printer Strobe Host gt Printer Busy Host Printer Ack Host Printer 2 TYPE2 Data 1 to 8 Host gt Printer Strobe Host gt Printer Busy Host Printer Ack Host Printer 5 4 19 Web Printer Function Selection With this parameter you can select whether or not the B SX series printer can be used as a web printer When x22 PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 18 times SLSPARAMETLER SEI WEB PRINTER OFF Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART Unavailable d After selecting the Web printer function press the PAUSE key NOTE When WEB PRINTER ON selected the status of the B SX series printer connected in a network can be checked through the Web browser 5 29 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 20 Input Prime Selection With this parameter you can select whether or not the Reset operation can be performed when INIT signal is ON When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 19 times lt Z gt PARAMETER SET INPUT PRIME ON
54. FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTARTI BACK ADJ 0 5mm BACK ADJ 0 BACK ADJ 0 5mm FEED BACK ADJ 9 0mm BACK ADJ 9 5mm FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 0 5mm change up to 9 5 mm RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 0 5mm change up to 9 5 mm After completing the fine adjustment press the PAUSE key Back Feed Length Fine Adjustment Example 0 0 mm Feed lt lt lt print Start Position 3 0 mm som Qc eq T eee lt lt lt lt NOTE The fine adjustment value equals to the sum of the fine adjustment values set by the PC command and this parameter The maximum back feed length fine adjustment value is 9 5mm When the value reached the maximum the value remains unchanged even if the subsequent fine adjustment is performed 5 3 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT 5 5 4 X Axis Fine Adjustment With this parameter you can fine adjust the print position on X Axis When lt 3 gt ADJUST SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 3 times lt 3 gt ADJUST SET X ADJUST 0 0 Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTARTI X ADJUST 0 5mm X ADJUST 0 0mm X ADJUST 0 5mm FEED X ADJUST 99 0mm X ADJUST 99 5mm FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 0 5mm change
55. High It is LOW MARK while no data is being sent Data line from which the printer sends data to the host send data line TD Transmit Data Output pee is and 0 is High LOW MARK while no data is being sent CTS Clear to Send Input 5 from the host This printer ignores this Output signal to the host When READ BUSY RTS protocol is selected this signal means READY to receive data RTS Request to Send Output When the receive buffer is nearly full the signal turns to Low and High when nearly empty In case of other protocol is selected this signal 15 always High level after the power is turned on Output signal from the printer When READY BUSY DTR or XON XOFF DC1 DC3 READY BUSY DTR is selected this signal means READY to receive data DTR Data Terminal Ready When the receive buffer is nearly full the signal turns to Low and High when nearly eimpty In case of XON XOFF DC1 DC3 or READY BUSY RTS this signal is always High level after the power is turned on NIMM SG Signal Ground Ground for all data and control signals Input signal from the host It must be High for the DSR Data Set DSR Data Set Ready Input printer to receive data RD Received Data 1 OUTLINE EO10 33013A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS Interface circuit W Input circuit Output circuit 5 75188 or equivalent RD 5 75189 or equ
56. Hole Make sure that the print head harness doesn t appear out of the printer block If so the print head 7 harness may touch the ribbon and the media causing a print failure Ka 4 3 Print Head Harness Printer Block Perform a test print Make sure that printing was performed correctly If the print tone is improper refer to Section 5 5 5 to adjust the print tone 8 Refer to Section 5 8 3 to perform a maintenance counter clear 9 10 19 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 8 PLATEN 10 8 PLATEN 1 Open the top cover Refer to Section 3 1 2 Open the printer block Refer to Section 3 3 3 Push the hook through the rectangle hole with a fine tool to remove the platen holder cover Hook Platen Holder Cover 4 Remove the platen holder and the strip plate Strip Plate Platen Holder 5 Pull the platen ass y to the right until the entire pulley appears 6 Pull the pulley forward 7 Pull the platen to the left to detach it from the printer 1 id AA i Pulley Zu Platen 7 10 20 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 8 PLATEN 8 Replace the platen with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal NOTES 1 Apply FLOIL to the platen pulley before installing the platen Pulley Platen 2 When installing the platen first fully insert the pulley into the printer Also make sure that
57. Lever must be set to Lock position This ensures that the Print Head is closed There are two head pressure levels in the Lock position Set the Head Lever depending on the media type Position Labels Position Tags However proper position may differ depending on media For details refer to TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative Do not turn the Locking Ring counter clockwise too far or it may come off the Supply Holder The following procedure shows the steps to properly load the media into the printer so that it feeds straight and true through the printer The printer prints both labels and tags 1 Turn off the power and open the Top Cover 2 Turn the Head Lever to Free position then release the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 3 Open the Print Head Block Print Head Block Cover Head Lever Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 4 Turn the Locking Ring counterclockwise and remove the Supply Holder from the Supply Shaft Locking Ring Supply Shaft Supply Holder E2 6 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 2 7 Loading the Media 27 Loading the Media 5 Put the media on the Supply Shaft Cont 6 Pass the media around the Damper then pull the media towards the front of printer T Align the projection of the Supply Holder with the groove of the Supply Shaft and push the Supply Holder against the media until the media 15 held firmly in place This will centre the
58. MERO RSS Limited RSS Expanded IEEE A PDF417 EA4 3 GLOSSARIES GLOSSARIES Bar code A code which represents alphanumeric characters by using a series of black and white stripes in different widths Bar codes are used in various industrial fields Manufacturing Hospitals Libraries Retail Transportation Warehousing etc Reading bar codes is a fast and accurate means of capturing data while keyboard entry tends to be slow and inaccurate Batch mode Issue mode that continuously prints media until the specified number of media has been printed Black mark A mark printed on the media so that the printer can maintain a constant print position by detecting this mark Black mark sensor A reflective sensor which detects the difference of potential between the black mark and print area to find the print start position Built in rewinder mode Printer mode of operation where a strip module is installed to take up printed media onto the build in rewinder Cut mode Printer mode of operation where an optional cutter module 15 installed to automatically cut media from the supply roll after they are printed The print command can specify to cut every media or to cut after a set number of media have been printed Cutter module A device used to cut the media DPI Dot Per Inch The unit used to express print density ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 GLOSSARIES
59. Message appears lt 1 gt DIAG VX X Press the FEED key 3 times The Test Print is ready to be performed lt 4 gt TEST PRINT NOTES When pressing the FEED and RESTART keys at the same time in the Test Print menu the message returns to lt 4 gt TEST PRINT If holding the FEED RESTART key for 0 5 seconds or longer in the Test Print menu the key is entered continuously The fine adjustment parameters are effective for the Test Print except for X Axis Fine Adjustment If any error occurs an error message appears and the printer stops printing After clearing the errors press the PAUSE key to return to the System Mode menu The printer does not restart printing automatically A changed parameter becomes enabled by pressing the PAUSE key A label size greater than the image buffer length cannot be designated If designated the printer prints in the image buffer or the printer stops because of an error The printer doesn t support the rotary cutter B 8204 QM at the print speed of 10 inches second Accordingly for the printer providing with the rotary cutter regardless of cut mode even if the print speed of 10 second is selected the printer performs at 6 inches second automatically When 15mm or less label pitch at 3 inches seconds or 30mm or less label pitch at 6 inches second is designated the printer performs printing without cut 5 43 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 6 TEST PRINT 5 6 1
60. RIBBON MOTORS TAKE UP FEED 4 Replace the ribbon motor take up with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e Tighten the two SMW 3x6 screws with 58 8 to 88 2N cm torque SMW 3x6 Screw Ribbon Motor Take up e Fit the positioning tabs of the ribbon motor take up into the positioning holes of the ribbon motor block e Apply FLOIL C 488 to the pulley using a soft cloth e Place the ribbon motor take up so that the harness faces the Main PC board Ribbon Motor Block Positioning Tab Pulle d Positioning Hole Ribbon Motor Take up 5 Refer to Section 5 5 6 to fine adjust the ribbon motor voltage 10 10 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 5 RIBBON MOTORS TAKE UP FEED 10 5 2 Ribbon Motor Feed 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Remove the ribbon motor feed harness from CN12 on the Main PC board and the cable clamp Ribbon Motor Feed Harness 3 Remove the two SMW 3x6 screws to detach the ribbon motor feed SMW 3x6 Screw Ribbon Motor Feed 10 11 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 5 RIBBON MOTORS TAKE UP FEED 4 Replace the ribbon motor feed with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e Tighten the two SMW 3x6 screws with 58 8 to 88 2N cm torque SMW 3x6 Screw Ribbon Motor Feed
61. SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING PC 1250 Le ee PC 1251 1252 COE CO RN eile ele el Ee Al a REED SITES ET m tt PERETE Haa EI Kd EBs Ais qeu rg sd 1254 Ol EE uL eu Tq a al e E HHUIBENMNEUHEDEH ERES A NER ELI RR mI se a MART CONTEE J K a in amp E ES o dF 5 19 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING APPS fo eee eE is 5 Em Kg i je n e n 151 e See INE Euro font codes are changeable For details refer to Euro Code Selection of
62. Specifying the Print Condition for the Test Print The print conditions for the Test Print should be specified before printing When lt 4 gt TEST PRINT appears press the PAUSE key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PRINT CONDITION Issue Count Setting To enter the Issue Count Setting menu press the PAUSE key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT ISSUE COUNT 1 ISSUE COUNT 5000 ISSUE COUNT 1000 RESTART COUNT 500 ISSUE COUNT 100 ISSUE COUNT 50 ISSUE COUNT 10 FEED ISSUE COUNT 5 ISSUE COUNT 3 ISSUE COUNT 1 After selecting the issue count press the PAUSE key to go to Print Speed Setting Print Speed Setting Select the print speed for the test print among 10 6 sec and 3 sec B SX4T or 8 sec 5 sec and 3 B SX5T lt 49 5 PRINT PRINT SPEED 6 s e B SX4T e B SX5T RESTART PRINT 5 5 PRINT SPEED 8 s PRINT SPEED 6 s PRINT SPEED 5775 FEED PRENE SPEED 2775 SPEED 2725 After selecting the print soeed press the PAUSE key to go to Sensor Type Selection NOTES 1 For the B SX4T the rotary cutter does not support the print speed of 10 sec Therefore selection of 10 will be automatically changed to 6 sec when the rotary cutter is installed 2 On the following conditions the rotary cutter does not cut Mediapith Printspeed soxar 1995 than 15 mm Less than 30 mm Less than 15 mm B SX5T Less than 25 mm Less than 38 5 44
63. To get around this problem a minimum threshold can be set for the sensor in the following way B Threshold setting procedure 1 Turn the power ON The printer is in stand by mode ON LINE Cn me 79 EA 2 co c c o gt lt 02 U S gt 0 59 m A D lt 4 The printer enters the pause mode 5 Press and hold the PAUSE key for at least 3 seconds in the pause state TRANSMI SSI VE gt lt IR Vx X 6 sensor type is displayed 7 To select the Reflective Sensor Black Mark Sensor press the FEED key REFLECTIVE B SX4T X 8 select the Transmissive Sensor Feed Gap Sensor press the FEED key again TRANSMISSIVE Cn gt lt IR VX 9 Press and hold the PAUSE key until more than 1 5 labels tags have been advanced The media is advanced until the PAUSE key is released Threshold setting is completed by this operation ea PAUSE SX4T VX OX 10 Press the RESTART key ON LINE SX4T VX X 11 The printer is in stand by 12 Send an issue command from the PC to the printer ON LINE SX4T VX NOTES If the PAUSE key is released within 3 seconds whilst in pause state paper will not feed Failure to feed more than 1 5 labels may result in an incorrect threshold setting While the Print Head Block is raised the PAUSE key does not work
64. Weight Available bar code types Available two dimensional code Available font Rotations Standard interface Optional interface AC100 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC220 240V 50 Hz 10 1 6 A 133 W maximum 0 18 A 14 W maximum 5 C to 40 C 40 F to 104 F 25 to 85 RH no condensation 8 dots mm 203 dpi Thermal transfer or Thermal direct 76 2 mm sec 3 inches sec 152 4 mm sec 6 inches sec details refer to Section 1 3 1 254 0 mm sec 10 inches sec 30 0 mm to 112 0 mm 1 2 inches to 4 4 inches 1 0 A 134 W maximum 0 13 A 14 W maximum 104 0 mm 4 1 inches Batch Cut Cut mode is enabled only when the optional Cutter Module is installed Strip Strip mode 15 enabled only when the optional Strip Module is installed 16 characters 2 lines 291 mm x 460 mm x 308 mm 11 5 x 18 1 x 12 1 39 7 Ib 18 kg Media and ribbon are not included JANS JAN13 EAN8 EAN8 2 digits EAN8 5 digits EAN13 EAN13 2 digits EAN13 5 digits UPC E UPC E 2 digits UPC E 5 digits UPC A UPC A 2 digits UPC A 5 digits MSI ITF NW 7 CODE39 CODE93 CODE128 EAN128 Industrial 2 to 5 Customer Bar Code POSTNET KIX CODE RM4SCC ROYAL MAIL 4STATE CUSTOMER CODE RSS14 Data Matrix PDF417 QR code Maxi Code Micro PDF417 CP Code Times Roman 6 sizes Helvetica 6 sizes Presentation 1 size Letter Gothic 1 size Prestige Elite 2 sizes Courier 2 sizes OCR 2 types Gothic 1 size Outlin
65. amp Remaining flash memory capacity for storing writable characters 0 to 3147 in bytes mm Acceptance Restoration Of Status LCD Message Printer Status RESTART key ine rons m bn lhe Yes No ON LINE momens In online mode die printer in Bm 2 HEAD OPEN o leh block is opened in 3 PAUSE O e Theprinteris paused 1 Yes Yes 4 COMMS ERROR occurred during communication through the RS 232C 5 PAPERJAM e The media is jammed during paper feed Yes Yes E A problem has occurred with the cutter Yes 6 CUTTER ERROR DEDE dd Bd B The media has run out or the media is 8 NORIBBON e Theribbonhasrunout Yes Yes EE Feed or printing was attempted with the Yes Yes BERE print head block open HEAD ERROR O There is a problem with the print head EXCESS HEAD TEMP The print head is overheated The ribbon has been torn A problem has 12 IRIBBON ERROR occurred with the sensor that determines the torque for the ribbon motor n BETIS REWIND FULL 7 REWIND FULL 7 lom overflow error has occurred in rewinder unit ME In writable character or PC command 14 save mode RM THHE amp amp amp An error has occurred while writing to 18 FLASH WRITE ERR fr An erase error has occurred in formatting Data cannot be stored be
66. authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Using insecticides and other chemicals Do not expose the machines to insecticides or other volatile solvents This will cause the cabinet or other parts to deteriorate or cause the paint to peel 11 ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page PRODUCT OVERVIEW e cR 1 1 Mott 1 1 DOE Z0 mm E1 1 129 M leote d qe E E E TU E1 1 WA S ttm TET 1 2 UNE ejes E1 3 lot DIMENSIONS assiette 1 3 NOW an I 1 3 ko REAL S ALI es E1 3 LR e geal 2 peer ace ieee ee Seer eps ete E1 4 MALCOM ERE D EM 1 4 5 2 1 Al mM E2 1 2 2 Procedure before Operation sss enne nnns E2 2 FUN NE Um UTC 2 2 2 4 Connecting the Cables to Your E2 3 25 Connecting ING POWER 2 4 26 FurnngtrePrnter ON OLRPI ast ea tee tet oa o ie E2 5 2 0 1 TENNO CONDO PINE IER
67. black screws and front plate 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 18 33012 4 1 SWING CUTTER B 4205 QM NO Open the top cover Refer to Section 3 1 Co Remove the side panel L from the printer Refer to section 3 2 Open the printer block Refer to Section 3 3 Attach the cutter unit to the front of the printer with the cutter attachment screws and the FL 4x6 rew SS Cutter Unit E oer bo el E 11 m Cutter Attachment Screw FL 4x6 Screw 6 Connect the cutter harness to CN1 on the cutter I F PC board 7 Fit the bush to the cutter harness in the orientation shown below CN1 Bush Cutter PC Board Cutter Harness Cutter Harness 8 Insert the cutter harness into the gap between the cutter unit and the printer and then into the hole in the main frame Fit the bush into the hole Frame 4 5 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 1 SWING CUTTER B 4205 QM 9 Close the print head block and the ribbon shaft holder plate NOTE DO NOT excessively push down the print head block to close it Doing so may cause a failure of the print head block or damage to the print head 10 Connect the cutter harness to CN15 on the Main PC Board Main PC Board CN15 Cutter Harness 11 Fit the cutter cover on the cutter attachment screws and fix it to the cutter unit with the two cutter SCrews NOTE
68. blade 1 Remove the cutter cover and the media guide cover B 8204 QM B 4205 QM ie Media Guide Cover Media Guide Cover 2 Wipe the cutter blade with a soft cloth or a cotton swab moistened with alcohol Wipe the media path with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol B 8204 QM B 4205 QM Cutter Blade 3 3 Media Path Media Path Cutter Blade NOTE For the B 8204 QM turn the cutter blade clockwise so as to clean easily 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE EO18 33012A 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 6 Apply FLOIL G 488 to the cutter unit using a soft cloth CAUTION 1 Lubrication During parts replacement 2 Kinds of oil FLOIL G 488 1 Kg can Parts No 19454906001 3 Do not spray the inside of the printer with lubricants Unsuitable oil can damage the mechanism All machines are generally delivered in their best condition Efforts should be made to keep them that way Lack of oil or the presence of debris or dust may cause an unexpected failure To maintain in optional operating condition periodically clean the machine and apply the proper kind of oil to each part in which lubrication is needed Although the frequency of lubrication varies according to how often the machine is used as a minimum it is necessary to lubricate before any part becomes dry It is also necessary to wipe off excessive oll or it will collect dirt 7 Confirm that the problem occurs as reported
69. blank media After printing is completed the display returns to lt 4 gt TEST PRINT Pressing the PAUSE key causes the display to shown NON PRINTING again Then press the FEED key NOTE Ihe Non Printing function looks like a media feeding m Print Sample of Non print 0 49 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 6 TEST PRINT 5 6 8 Factory Test FACTORY TEST While selecting the Factory test press the PAUSE key to start printing the factory test pattern After printing is completed the display returns to lt 4 gt TEST PRINT Pressing the PAUSE key causes the display to shown FACTORY TEST again Then press the FEED key Print Sample of Factory Test 5 6 9 Auto Print AUTO PRINT TRAN Feed Gap Sensor AUTO PRINTCREFL Black Mark Sensor While selecting the Auto Print press the PAUSE key to feed one media and print slant lines 3 dots on 5 pieces of media Next press the PAUSE key to print bar codes on 5 pieces of media Pressing the PAUSE key again causes the printer to print characters on 5 pieces of media NOTES 1 Select AUTO PRINT TRAN when using labels and AUTO PRINT REFL when using tag paper 2 Auto print is performed under the conditions below Parameter setting and print tone fine adjustment value is ignored Print speed 6 inches second B SX4T 5 inches second B SX5T Sensor type Black mark or feed gap sensor Printing method Thermal transfer Issuing mod
70. blind plate A safe as this will be necessary when the machine is modified to the standard type 4 Ifthe PCMCIA interface board is also installed attach the PCB attachment plate to the plate to which the PCMCIA interface board is secured with the SM 3x6 screw If not go to the next step PCB Attachment Plate SM 3x6 Screw PCMCIA Interface Board 4 28 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 7 LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM 5 Firmly connect CN50 on the LAN interface board directly to CN7 on the Main PC board or CN1 on the PCMCIA interface board When connecting to the Main PC Board When connecting to the PCMCIA Interface Board CN7 CN1 LAN Interface Board LAN Interface Board MAIN PC Board PCMCIA Interface Board 6 Secure the LAN interface board to the rear plate with the two SM 3x6 screws When connecting to the Main PC Board When connecting to the PCMCIA Interface Board Rear Plate LAN Interface Board Rear Plate LAN Interface Board SM 3x6 Screw 4 29 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 7 LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM 7 Tighten the two M 3x5 screws on the LAN interface board that were loosened previously Refer to Caution 8 Secure the LAN interface board to the PCB support plate when connecting to the Main PC board or PCB attachment plate when connecting to the PCMCIA interface board with the SM 3x6 screw When connectin
71. body by touching the metal cabinet of the printer before touching the card Before inserting or removing a PCMCIA card make sure that the printer s power is turned off Be sure to protect PCMCIA Cards when not in use by putting them into their protective Model Name ici NN Printed Side Do not subject the card to any shocks or 3 Slightly pull and fold the Eject Button upward excessive force nor expose the card to j extremes in temperature or humidity The card may be inserted into the slot halfway even in the wrong orientation However the slot is 4 The following PCMCIA cards can be used safety designed so that the card will not seat inst th nn r San Disk A card conforming to the hm ATACAR PC card ATA standard 1 Make sure that the printer s Power Switch is in the OFF position 2 Hold the PCMCIA Card so that the side with the model name faces left Insert the card into the proper slot until the Eject Button pops Eject Button out Slot 1 Memory type cards only Slot 2 I O type cards such LAN cards te Eject Button Install into the slot 2 LAN Card 3 COM 3CCES89ET Series only This card installed into the slot 1 will not work NOTE EF 4M TB Reading a read only type flash EF AM TB DC Read Write memory is possible if it has been used on the TOSHIBA echnologies printer such as B 472 and B 57
72. bold Q Courier medium R Courier bold lt 5 gt 9 lt T gt OCR B lt q gt Gothic 725 Black lt Outline Font A gt e b d Outline Font B gt Helvetica bold P Outline FontE OF 2 9456 74 9 248 lt Font F gt 0723456789 lt Outline Font G gt 7 2345678 5 Outline Font H Dutch 801 bold Outline Font gt Brush 738 regular Outline Font J gt Gothic 725 Black EA4 1 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES Cont B Bar codes JANS EANS 4940 Interleaved 2 of 5 1 2678905 01234 NW7 a1234567890a UPC E 123 56 5 EAN13 5 digits 9 780123 45678 0 1254 niii d1234x 6 CODE39 Full ASCII ABCDabc UPC E 2 digits o 1123456 s EAN8 2 digits ki Il 12545 12 12 4940
73. by wiping with a dry cloth or a cloth slightly dampened with a mild detergent solution NEVER USE THINNER OR ANY OTHER VOLATILE SOLVENT on the plastic covers USE ONLY TOSHIBA TEC SPECIFIED paper and ribbons DO NOT STORE the paper or ribbons where they might be exposed to direct sunlight high temperatures high humidity dust or gas Ensure the printer is operated on a level surface Any data stored in the memory of the printer could be lost during a printer fault Try to avoid using this equipment on the same power supply as high voltage equipment or equipment likely to cause mains interference Unplug the machine whenever you are working inside it or cleaning it Keep your work environment static free Do not place heavy objects on top of the machines as these items may become unbalanced and fall causing injury Do not block the ventilation slits of the machines as this will cause heat to build up inside the machines and may cause fire Do not lean against the machine It may fall on you and could cause injury Care must be taken not to injure yourself with the printer paper cutter Unplug the machine when it is not used for a long period of time Place the machine on a stable and level surface Request Regarding Maintenance Utilize our maintenance services After purchasing the machine contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance once a year to have the inside of the machine cleaned Otherwise dust will build up in
74. cause improper print quality Print Head Bracket 4 Never disassemble the head block frame Doing so may cause a print failure such as ribbon wrinkle blurred print etc Head Block Frame 1 Open the top cover Refer to Section 3 1 2 Turn the head lever to the Free position to open the ribbon shaft holder plate Refer to Section 3 3 10 17 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 7 PRINT HEAD 3 Remove the two SMW 3x8 screws to detach the print head ass y from the head bracket SMW 3x8 Screw Head Bracket Print Head Ass y SMW 3x8 Screw 4 Open the printer block Refer to Section 3 3 NOTE At this time be sure to support the bottom of the print head so as not to drop onto the platen Failure to do this may cause the print head and the platen to be damaged 5 Pull the print head in the direction indicated by the arrow And then disconnect the two harnesses to detach the print head ass Printer Block Print Head Ass y Print Head Harness 10 18 18 33012 10 7 PRINT HEAD 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT Replace the print head ass y with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal NOTE Fit the positioning pins of the head bracket into the positioning holes of the print head 6 ass y which doesn t require the position adjustment Head Bracket Print Head Ass y Positioning Pin Positioning Pin Positioning Hole Positioning
75. condition 2 When the PAUSE key is pressed during printing the number of unprinted media is displayed 6 7 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 3 DUMP MODE 6 3 DUMP MODE In Dump mode any characters sent from the host computer will be printed Received characters are expressed in hexadecimal values This allows the user to verify programming commands and debug the program 1 9 The printer is turned on standing by or printing ON LINE B SX4T VX X Press the PAUSE key PAUSE 52 The number of unprinted media See NOTE B SX4T VX X During the Pause state press and hold the RESTART key for 3 seconds or more The display shows lt 1 gt RESET lt 1 gt RESET Press the FEED key The display shows lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Press the FEED key The display shows lt 8 gt ADJUST SET 3 ADJ UST SET Press the FEED key The display shows 4 DUMP MODE Press the PAUSE key to enter the Dump Mode 4 DUMP MODE BUFFER RS 232C Select the receive buffer to be dumped with the FEED or RESTART key 4 DUMP MODE BUFFER RS 232C e RS 232C RS 232C Receive Buffer RESTART Centronics Receive Buffer e NETWORK Network Interface Receive Buffer e BASIC 1 BASIC Interpreter I F Interpreter buffer e BASIC 2 BASIC Interpreter Interpreter Printer buffer e USB USB Receive Buffer FEED ai Select the printing method with t
76. cut after a set number of media have been printed Cutter module A device used to cut the media DPI Dot Per Inch The unit used to express print density ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 GLOSSARIES Expansion I O interface An optional interface circuit that may be installed into printer to allow the printer to be connected to an external device such as a wrapping machine and to receive feed print start and pause signals from the external device and to send back print pause and error status signals to the external device Feed gap sensor A transmissive sensor which detects the difference of potential between the gap between labels and the label to find the print position of the label Font A complete set of alphanumeric characters in one style of type E g Helvetica Courier Times Gap Clearance between labels IPS Inch per second The unit used to express print speed Label A type of media with adhesive backing LCD Liquid Crystal Display Installed on the operation panel and displays Operation modes error message and so on Media Material on which data is printed by the printer Label tag paper fanfold paper perforated paper etc PCMCIA interface An optional interface circuit that may be installed into the printer to allow the use of the small credit card sized PC cards such as flash memory cards and LAN cards PCMCIA is the acronym for Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
77. cutter label length should be 35 0 mm Gap length 2 2 The rotary cutter does not support the print speed of 10 sec When using the Rotary Cutter be sure to install the Ribbon Saving Module B 9904 R QM Failure to do this may cause a paper jam or ribbon error When marking black marks on the label rolls they should be marked at the gaps the fly issue means that the printer can feed and print without stopping between labels There are restrictions in use of the media which is narrower than 50 mm For details refer to TOSHIBA TEC service representative A1 3 2 Detection Area of the Transmissive Sensor The Transmissive Sensor is movable from the centre to the left edge of media The Transmissive Sensor detects a gap between labels as illustrated below tre of i lt Label gt Area to be detected Centre of media Sensor position Print side Min 6 0 mm when using Gap Min 2 0 mm Label the cutter module Label Min 12 mm Media feed direction Sensor is movable within this range EA1 3 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 A1 3 Media A1 3 2 Detection Area of the Transmissive Sensor Cont lt Tag paper with square holes gt Centre of media Sensor position N Print side lt Min 12 mm gt Square holes Min 2 0 mm Round holes are not acceptable Media feed direction Sensor is movable within this range NOTE
78. det aive UR som a E2 5 2 6 2 T rning OFF tlie cte Ia einige E SE blo tele tee time seca E2 5 2 7 LOAGING the Media Mm Tm E2 6 28 Loading ING IDO OM etic 2 11 2 9 Inserting the Optional PCMCIA E2 12 ZI MEIST E2 13 ON CINE est E3 1 294 a 1 SPESSORE EET UTEM E3 2 e CE E3 2 SP MEN c E E3 3 INUIT INN Esco cs cator E4 1 10 a 6 REM 4 1 4 1 1 Print Head Platen SeFsOFS d oves eee 4 1 431 2 Covers and Panelo OEE E4 2 4 1 3 Optional Gutter Module ioo ru EA E4 2 42 Care Handling of the Media and E4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING ipsutis EERE aeai 5 1 94 eee uhi easy wt sole a ean ae ea E5 1 8 0 JP OSSIDIC PIODICIM NE TEES E5 2 5 3 REMOVING Jatiried Media 5 3 54 Threshold SOWING TE 5 4 ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 APPENDIX 1 SPECIPICATIONS eee ee et eee eee nate eee EA1 1 ATI PONO
79. fire electrocution NOTES 1 Manual instructions must be followed when installing option kits or adding cables to avoid system failures and to insure proper performance and operation 2 Failure to follow manual instructions or any unauthorized modification substitution or change to this product will void the limited product warranty 18 33012 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page UNPACKING 1 1 1 1 PROCEDURES 1 1 1 2 OHEGRKS 1 3 PRINTER INSTALLATION 1 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE 3 1 3 1 OPENING CLOSING THE TOP 3 9 3 2 REMOVING THE SIDE PANEL 3 9 3 3 OPENING CLOSING THE PRINTER BLOCK 3 4 3 4 REMOVING THE OPERATION PANEL 3 5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 4 1 4 1 SWING CUTTER 4205
80. ink which contain hard substances such as carbonic calcium and kaolin Al O3 2510 2 For further information please contact your local distributor or your media and ribbon manufacturers 4 3 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 5 1 Error Messages 5 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter lists the error messages possible problems and their solutions If a problem cannot be solved by taking the actions described in this chapter do not attempt to repair the printer Turn off and unplug the printer then contact an authorised TOSHIBA TEC service representative for assistance 5 1 Error Messages NOTES e fan error is not cleared by pressing the RESTART key turn the printer off and then on After the printer is turned off all print data in the printer is cleared indicates the number of unprinted media Up to 9999 in pieces Problems Causes Online mode with the Print Head Block open the RESTART key COMMS ERROR A communication error has occurred Make sure the interface cable 15 correctly connected to the printer and the host and the host is turned on PAPER JAM 1 The media is jammed in the media Remove the jammed media and clean path The media is not fed smoothly the Platen Then reload the media correctly Finally press the RESTART key A wrong Media Sensor is selected for 2 Turn the printer off and then on Then the media being
81. of the RS 232C interface When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 6 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET XON READY AUTO Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option XON XOFF AUTO XON XOFF mode RESTART KON READY AUTO XON XOFF READY BUSY DTR mode READY BUSY READY BUSY DTR mode FEED XON XOFF mode READY BUSY RTS RTS mode gt lt O 227 gt lt 711 711 After selecting transmission control code press the PAUSE key NOTE The following is the detailed descriptions for each transmission control code 1 XON XOFF AUTO At the power on time the printer outputs At the power off time the printer outputs XOFF 2 XON READY AUTO At the power on time the printer outputs At the power off time the printer outputs XOFF 3 READY BUSY At the power on time the DIR signal output from the printer turns to High level READY At the power off time the printer does not outout XOFF 4 XON XOFF At the power on time the printer outouts XON At the power off time the printer does not output XOFF 5 READY BUSY RTS At the power on time the RTS signal outout from the printer turns to High level READY At the power off time the printer does not outout XOFF C1 22 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 8 LCD Message Selection With this parameter you can select the language in
82. printer receive buffer becomes full he printer sends an XOFF code 13H at power off time RTS signal is always High level 1 OUTLINE EO10 33013A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS READY BUSY RTS Protocol When initialized after power on this printer becomes ready to receive data and converts the RTS signal to High level READY The printer converts the RTS signal to Low level BUSY when the free area in the receive buffer amount to 10K bytes or less he printer converts the RTS signal to High level READY when the free area in the receive buffer amount to 512KB or more When there is no free area in the receive buffer the printer discards received data which exceed the receive buffer capacity without storing it in the buffer After detecting a BUSY signal the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer becomes full DTR signal is always High level READY e The host should keep the DSR signal High level NOTE Be sure to select the READY BUSY RTS protocol when controlling the flow between the Windows Also be sure to select Hardware for the flow control in the Windows communication port setting 9 Pin description fo FG Frame Ground Frame Ground J Ground line for circuit protection Data line from which the printer receives data from the host receive data line Logic 1 is Low and 0 is
83. the platen holder cover 15 fixed with the hook Platen 10 21 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 9 FEED ROLLER 10 9 FEED ROLLER 1 Open the top cover Refer to Section 3 1 2 Open the printer block Refer to Section 3 3 3 Make sure that the media guide is closed In this condition you can easily remove the feed roller holder cover on the left side of the feed roller Lid AH B 7 w 9 Media Guide 4 Push the hooks through the rectangle holes with a fine tool to open the feed roller holder covers Feed Roller Holder Cover Left Side Feed Roller Feed Roller Holder Cover 10 22 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 9 FEED ROLLER NOTE Ifthe left feed roller holder cover is hard to open remove the side panel L and open the feed roller holder cover from the opposite side of the printer as shown in the pictures below 1 a a Feed Roller Feed Roller Holder Cover 5 Detach the feed roller holder and the feed roller Feed Roller Feed Roller Holder 6 Replace the feed roller with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal NOTES 1 Apply FLOIL to the feed roller gear before installing the feed roller 3 if E 3 Feed Roller Gear Feed Roller 2 When reassembling make sure that the feed roller is attached correctly Also make sure that the feed roller holder c
84. the connector M 3x5 Screw 2 When using the PCMCIA interface board together first install the PCMCIA PC board and then USB interface board All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below Installation Manual 1 copy SM 3x6 Screw 4 pcs NOTE When using the PCMCIA interface board B 9700 PCM QM together the PCB attachment plate will be used Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord 2 Loosen the two M 3x5 screws of the USB interface board Refer to Caution above 3 Remove the side panel L from the printer Refer to section 3 2 4 Remove the two SM 3x6 screws to detach the blind plate A from the back Blind Plate A SM 3x6 Screw 4 23 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 6 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM 5 If the PCMCIA interface board is used together with the USB interface board attach the PCB attachment plate to the plate to which the PCMCIA interface board is secured with the SM 3x6 screw If not go to the next step PCB Attachment Plate SM 3x6 Screw PCMCIA Interface Board 6 Firmly connect CN50 connector on the USB interface board directly to CN7 on the Main PC board or CN1 on the PCMCIA interface board When connecting to the Main PC Board When connecting the PCMCIA Interface Board CN7 CN1 CN50 USB Interface Board Main PC Board USB Interface Board PCMCIA Interfa
85. the issue count with the FEED or RESTART key SA PRENT ESUE COUNT 1 6 Press the PAUSE key and print speed setting display will appear Set the print speed with the FEED or RESTART key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PRENT SPERED 19 7758 7 Press the PAUSE key and the sensor type setting display will NOTES appear Select the sensor type with the FEED or RESTART key 1 Select the sensor type which matches the media being used Basically the Reflective Sensor Black Mark Sensor is for tag paper and the 8 Press the PAUSE key and the print mode setting display will Transmissive Sensor Feed appear Select the print mode with the FEED or RESTART Gap Sensor is for labels key Select the print mode which matches the media being used Basically the thermal transfer is with ribbon and the thermal direct is without ribbon lt 4 gt TEST PRINT SENSOR TRANS lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PRD IXPE TRANSER E2 13 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 10 Test Print Cont NOTE When PAPER FEED is selected the printer feeds the media to the correct print start position If the print start position adjustment is unnecessary select PAPER NO FEED and save the media NOTE If the FEED key is pressed after the blank labels are printed the printer will enter the Factory Test mode To exit from the Factory Test mode press the PAUSE key 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ENG
86. to set the Co nt media for each mode is provided below Batch mode In the batch mode the media is continuously printed and fed until the number of labels tags specified in the issue command have been printed NOTES Strip mode Be sure to set the Selection When the optional Strip Module is fitted the backing paper is Switch to STANDARD automatically removed from label at the Strip Plate as each label 15 PEEL OFF position printed The backing paper is easier to feed back to the Take Up 1 Remove enough labels from the leading edge of the media to leave Spool if the Front Plate is 500mm of backing paper free removed 2 Insert the backing paper under the Strip Plate Fit the Take Up Clip so that 3 Wind the backing paper onto the Take up Spool and fix it in position the longer side of the clip is with the Take up Clip Wind the paper counterclockwise around fitted into the shallow groove the spool as this is the direction it rotates in the Take Up Spool 4 Rotate the Take up Spool anti clockwise a few times to remove any The backing paper can be slack in the backing paper wound directly onto the Take 5 Set the Selection Switch mounted on the Rewinder Assembly to up Spool or a paper core STANDARD PEEL OFF position When using the Take up Spool detach the Holder Stopper by removing the 3x4 screw Otherwise it may Take up Spool be difficult to pull out the wound backing paper roll H
87. turning off the printer 2 6 1 Turning ON the Printer 1 To turn ON the printer power press the Power Switch as shown in the CAUTION diagram below Note that is the power ON side of the switch Use the power switch to turn the printer On Off Plugging or unplugging the Power Cord to turn the printer On Off may cause fire an electric shock or damage to the printer Power Switch NOTE If a message other than ON LINE appears on the display or 2 Check that the ON LINE message appears in the LCD Message e 5 Display and that the ON LINE and POWER LED lights illuminated go to Section 5 1 acne Error Messages 2 6 2 Turning OFF the Printer 1 Before turning off the printer Power Switch verify that the ON LINE message appears in the LCD Message Display and that the ON LINE CAUTION LED light is on and is not flashing 1 Do not turn off the printer 2 To turn OFF the printer power press the Power Switch as shown in the power while the media is diagram below Note that O is the power OFF side of the switch being printed as this may cause a paper jam or damage to the printer Do not turn off the printer power while the ON LINE lamp is blinking as this may cause damage to your computer Power Switch 2 5 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 7 Loading the Media 2 7 Loading the Media Do not touch any moving parts To reduce the risk of fingers jewellery
88. 1 pc QQ P No 7FM00332000 P No 0036801 QP P No 7FM00256000 Rewinder Guide Plate 1 pc SMW 4x8 Sems Screws 2 pcs P No FMBD0034501 P No X0 00161000 E1 2 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 1 5 Appearance 1 5 The names of parts or units introduced in this section are used in following chapters 1 5 1 Dimensions 291 11 5 460 18 1 308 12 1 Dimensions in mm inches 1 5 2 Front View LCD Message Display Top Cover Operation Panel Supply Window Media Outlet 1 5 3 Rear View Parallel Interface PCMCIA Card Slot Option Connector Centronics USB Connector Option or LAN Connector Option USB Connector Option or LAN Serial Interface Connector Option Connector RS 232C Expansion I O Interface Connector Power Switch AC Power Inlet OFF ON 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 1 5 Appearance 1 5 4 Operation Panel LCD Message Display POWER LED Green ON LINE LED Green ERROR LED Red FEED key PAUSE key RESTART key Please see Section 3 1 for further information about the Operation Panel Locking Ring 1 5 5 Interior Ribbon Stopper Supply Holder Print Head Block Supply Shaft Print Head Platen Take up Spool Head Lever Ribbon Shaft E1 4 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERS
89. 2 INTEL IMCO04FLSA Simple Flash Memory TECNOLOGY STI FL 4A Card 4 MB MF84MI G7DATOI PC Card KING Read See NOTE Centennial FLO4M 20 11138 67 Technologies Inc Card 1 MB E2 14 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 2 10 Test Print 2 10 Test Print A print test should be performed to check that the printer is operating correctly The following paragraphs guide you through the diagnostic procedure for test label printing Please follow the step by step procedures exactly for best results 1 Use label stock for the test print For best results use labels that are 76 mm or longer in length 2 Press and hold the FEED and PAUSE keys while turning on the printer power switch The LCD Message Display will show the lt 4 gt TEST PRINT 4 Press the PAUSE key and the print condition setting display will appear lt 4 gt 51 PRINT PRINT CONDITION 5 Press the PAUSE key and the issue count setting display will appear Set the issue count with the FEED or RESTART key SA TEST PRENT ISSUE COUNT 1 6 Press the PAUSE key and print speed setting display will appear Set the print speed with the FEED or RESTART key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PREET SPEED O 75 7 Press the PAUSE key and the sensor type setting display will NOTES appear Select the sensor type with the FEED or RESTART key 1 Select the sensor type which matches the media being used Basically the Reflective S
90. 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 2 Procedure before Operation 2 2 Procedure before Operation NOTE To communicate with the host computer one of the following cables is required 1 RS 232C cable 25 pins 2 Centronics cable 36 pins 3 USB B plug Option 4 LAN 10 Base T or 100 Base TX Option 2 3 Fitting the Fan Filter This section describes the outline of the printer setup 10 11 Unpack the accessories and printer from the box Refer to Safety Precautions in this manual and set up the printer at a proper location Fit the Fan Filter to the printer Refer to Section 2 3 The host computer must have a serial Centronics parallel USB or LAN port Refer to Section 2 4 Be sure to insert the power cord plug into an AC outlet Refer to Section 2 5 Load the media Refer to Section 2 7 Adjust the position of the Feed Gap Sensor or Black Mark Sensor depending on the media being used Refer to Section 2 7 Load the ribbon Refer to Section 2 8 Turn the power ON Refer to Section 2 6 Perform a test print Refer to Section 2 10 Install the Printer Drivers Refer to the Printer Driver Manual When installing the printer it is important to ensure that the Fan Filter is attached before using the printer The Fan Filter consists of 2 parts 1 Filter Pad 2 Filter Retainer To fit the Fan Filter put the Filter Pad inside the Filter Retainer and sim
91. 3 seconds or longer v TRANSMI SSI VE Threshold setting for the Feed SXAT V y Gap Sensor FEED key v PERL VE Threshold setting for the Black B SX4T Vy x Mark Sensor NOTE For procedures please refer to 6 1 THRESHOLD SETTING 6 4 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 ON LINE MODE Reset Operation Parameter Setting Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment and Dump Mode ON LINE B SX4T x PAUSE key Press and hold the RESTART key for 3 seconds or longer v lt 1 gt RESET RESTART key FEED key lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET RESTART key FEED key 3 ADJ UST SET Reset Operation Parameter Setting Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment RESTART key FEED key lt 4 gt DUMP MODE Dump Mode RESTART key FEED key NOTE This section describes the threshold setting for the Feed Gap Black Mark Sensor Reset Operation and Dump Mode The procedures of the Parameter Setting and Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment are described in the System Mode please refer to Section 5 4 and Section 5 5 respectively 6 5 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 1 THRESHOLD SETTING 6 1 THRESHOLD SETTING To maintain a constant print position the printer uses the Transmissive Sensor to detect the gap between labels by measuring the amount of light passing through the media When the media is pre printed the darker or more dense inks can interfere with this process causing paper jam errors
92. 33012A MAINTENANCE 3 4 REMOVING THE OPERATION PANEL 3 4 REMOVING THE OPERATION PANEL 1 Open the top cover Refer to section 3 1 2 Remove the side panel L from the printer Refer to section 3 2 3 Remove the SMW 4x8 screw that secures the operation panel ass y SMW 4x8 Screw 4 Half open the top cover otherwise the operation panel ass y cannot be removed from the printer T Top Cover p Operation Panel Ass y 5 Lift the operation panel ass y to release the hook and then remove the operation panel ass y by moving it forward 3 5 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A MAINTENANCE 3 4 REMOVING THE OPERATION PANEL 6 Disconnect the operation panel harness from the operation panel ass y Operation Panel Ass y Operation Panel Harness Bottom Plate 7 Reassemble in the reverse order of removal Lead the operation panel harness through the bush so that the side panel L does not catch it Operation Panel Harness Bush 3 6 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 18 33012 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1 Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing the optional equipment 2 Be careful not to pinch your fingers or hands with the covers The following optional equipments are provided for this printer B 4205 QM Swing Cutter B 9700 PCM
93. 34 1 1 Introduction 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing the TEC B SX4T series thermal printer This Owner s Manual contains from general set up through how to confirm the printer operation using a test print and should be read carefully to help gain maximum performance and life from your printer For most queries please refer to this manual and keep it safe for future reference Please contact your TOSHIBA TEC representative for further information concerning this manual 1 2 Features This printer has the following features e The print head block can be opened providing smooth loading of media and ribbon e Various kinds of media can be used as the media sensors can be moved from the centre to the left edge of the media e When the optional interface board 15 installed Web functions such as remote maintenance and other advanced network features are available e Superior hardware including the specially developed 8 dots mm 203 dots inch thermal print head which will allow very clear print at a printing speed of 76 2 mm sec 3 inches sec 152 4 mm sec 6 inches sec or 254 0 mm sec 10 inches sec e Besides the optional Cutter Module there is also an optional Strip Module Ribbon Saving Module PCMCIA Interface Board Expansion I O Interface Board LAN Interface Board and the USB Interface Board 1 3 Unpacking Unpack the printer as per the Unpacking Instructions supplied with the printer NOT
94. 4F Sample of the factory test label E2 18 3 ON LINE MODE ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 3 1 Operation Panel 3 ON LINE MODE This chapter describes usage of the keys on the Operation Panel in On Line mode When the printer is in On Line mode and connected to a host computer the normal operation of printing images on labels or tags can be accomplished 3 1 Operation Panel e The figure below illustrates the operation panel and key functions d 19 LCD Message Display ON LINE LED Green POWER LED ERROR LED Red Green FEED key RESTART key PASSET KEY The LCD Message Display shows messages in alphanumeric characters and symbols to indicate the printer s current status Up to 32 characters can be displayed on two lines There are three LED lights on the operation panel Illuminates when Flashes when POWER printer is turned on ON LINE The printer is ready to The printer is NOTE communicating with Flashes only when the Ribbon your computer Near End Detection function ts ERROR Any error occurs with The ribbon is nearly selected the printer over See NOTE NOTE There are three keys on the operation panel Use the RESTART key to PAUSE Used to stop printing temporarily RESTART Used to restart printing resume printing after a pause or after clearing an error FEED Used to feed the media E3 1 3
95. 92A2B2C 68 WEP KEY 3 303132333435363738393A3B3C 69 WEP KEY 4 404142434445464748494A4B4C NOTE Print conditions Preset count 1 Print speed 6 sec B SX4T 5 sec B SX5T Sensor No sensor Printing mode Thermal transfer Media length 288 mm Issue mode Batch printing e Descriptions of the Maintenance Counter Count Condition 1 Total media distance Counted when the feed motor drives to feed 0 0 to 3200 0 km covered print and issue the media Counted also Media distance covered during ribbon saving operation and back feed 0 0 to 3200 0 km See NOTE 6 2 Counted while printing back feed is not 0 0 to 200 0 km counted See NOTE 2 Counts every cut See NOTE 3 0 to 1000000 times 5 Print head up and down Counts every up and down of the print head 0 to 2000000 times using the solenoid for ribbon save operation Up down 1 count See NOTE 3 Counts when the ribbon motor drives to feed 0 to 2000 hours print and issue the media The driving time is not counted during ribbon saving operation but is during back feed See NOTE 4 8 RS 232C hardware error Counted when a parity overrun or framing to 255 times count error occurs See NOTE 5 System error count Counted when any error occurs 0 to 15 times 10 Momentary power failure Counts the number of times the power restores O to 15 times count while the CPU is busy after reset Ribbon motor driving 7 Sol
96. A print head using thermal transfer or thermal direct printing method Thermal transfer printing A printing method that the thermal print head heats an ink or resin coating on the ribbon against the media causing the ink resin to transfer onto the media Threshold setting A sensor setting operation to have the printer maintain a constant print position of pre printed media Transmissive sensor See Feed gap sensor USB Universal Serial Bus An interface that 15 used to connect peripherals such as a printer keyboard mouse The USB allows disconnection of a USB device without turning off the power INDEX INDEX A Auto ribbon saving 2 11 Backing paper 1 3 Bar code 1 1 Batch mode 2 9 Black mark 2 8 A1 2 1 4 Black mark length A1 3 Black mark sensor 2 8 4 1 Built in rewinder 2 10 C Centronics 1 3 2 3 Cut mode 2 10 Cutter module 2 10 4 2 A1 2 D Dimensions 1 3 E Effective Print length 1 3 Effective print width 1 3 ERROR LED 1 4 3 1 Error message 5 1 Expansion interface 1 3 2 3 Expansion I O interface board A1 2 F Fan filter 2 2 Feed gap sensor 2 8 4 1 FEED key 1 4 3 1 Flash memory card 2 12 G Gap 2 8 Al 3 Gap length A1 3 Guaranteed print area 1 5 H Headlever 1 4 2 6 I Interface 2 3 Al 1 A3 1 Issue mode 2 9 Al 1 ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 INDEX J Jammed media 5 3 L Label 2 6 A1 2 A1 3 LCD message display 1 3 1 4 3 1 M
97. AL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 8 EXPANSION I O INTERFACE BOARD B 7704 1O QM 5 Connect the expansion cable to CN3 on the Main PC board Main PC Board Expansion I O Cable 6 Secure the expansion I O board to the rear plate with the two B 3x6 screws removed in Step 4 7 Connect the expansion I O cable to CN1 on the expansion I O board Hear Plate B 3x6 Screw Expansion I O Cable 8 Reassemble the side panel L in the reverse order of removal 9 Perform a loop back check to confirm that the expansion board functions properly 4 32 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 1 OPERATION PANEL 5 SYSTEM MODE This chapter describes usage and purpose of the keys on the Operation Panel in System Mode For service personnel System Mode should be used for the following eight purposes check and print the system status the Maintenance Counter and the Print Head Element set the parameters for the communication with the host computer and the printer functions such as the keys and LCD Message Display To make fine adjustment related to the media issue To perform a test print for checking print quality To check the status of the sensors and to set the threshold of the media sensors To perform a Maintenance Counter clear and Parameter clear To set the IP Address To set the Basic setting To perform the factory mode 5 1 OPERATION PANEL The figure below illustrates the Operation Panel and
98. AMETER SET CONTROL CODE1 IB CONTROL RESTART CONTROL FE CONTROL GODEL FD CONTROL CODEI 02 FEED CONTROL CODEL QI CONTROL CODE1 00 NOTES 1 Pressing the FEED or RESTART key causes 1 byte change in the Control Code value 2 You cannot specify the same control code with the one used for the commands 3 You cannot use the specified Control Code for the data of the Data Command or Display Command C1 25 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING After setting the control code for Control Code 1 press the PAUSE key to show the CONTROL CODE2 screen In a same manner press the PAUSE key after setting the control code for Control Code 2 to display the CONTROL CODES screen CONTROL CODE1 PAUSE CONTROL CODE PAUSE CONTROL CODES Press the PAUSE key after setting the control code for Control Code 3 and the Strip Wait Status Selection screen will appear 5 4 13 Strip Wait Status Selection With this parameter you can select the strip wait status When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 12 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET PEEL ORR slo OFF Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART Unavailable FEED Available After selecting the Strip Wait Status press the PAUSE key 5 4 14 FEED Key Function Selection With this parameter you can select the function o
99. AN interface board or USB interface board together install the PCMCIA interface board first NOTE When both B 9700 PCM QM and B 9700 LAN QM are installed inserting a LAN PC card into the slot of the B 9700 PCM QM disables the B 9700 LAN QM All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below PCMCIA Interface Board 1 pc a CUm Installation Manual 1 copy e SM 3x6 Screw 3 pcs 1 Remove the side panel from the printer Refer to section 3 2 2 Loosen the two M 3x5 screws of the PCMCIA interface board Refer to Caution above 3 Remove the two SM 3x6 screws to detach the blind plate A from the back Hear Plate SM 3x6 Screw 27 5 Blind Plate 4 20 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 18 33012 4 5 PCMCIA INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 PCM QM NOTE case of the B SX5T or the B SX4T that the optional Expansion I O board B 7704 IO QM has been installed in remove the expansion I O board from the printer temporarily using the following procedure 1 Disconnect the Expansion I O cable from CN1 on the Expansion I O board 2 Remove the two B 3x6 screws to detach the Expansion I O board from the printer Rear Plate Expansion Board CN1 B 3x6 Screw Expansion I O Cable Firmly connect CN101 on the PCMCIA interface board directly to CN7 on the Main PC board CN101 PCMCIA Interface Board CN7 Mai
100. AUSE key for at least 3 seconds in the pause print start position even state when using pre printed labels TRANSMISSIVE If using the Transmissive 5 41 V1 0A ied 6 The sensor type is displayed continues to print out of position even after setting 7 Select the sensor to be adjusted by pressing the FEED key the threshold contact a TOSHIBA TEC service REFLECTIVE Black mark sensor representative SAAT 1 0 FEED key Y TRANSMISSIVE Feed gap sensor pao V1 0A 8 Press and hold the PAUSE key until more than 1 5 labels tags have been issued The media will continue to be fed until the PAUSE key is released Threshold setting for the selected sensor is completed by this operation PAUSE B SX4T V1 0A 9 Press the RESTART key ON LINE B SX4T V1 0A 10 The printer is in stand by 11 Send an issue command from the PC to the printer ON LINE B SX4T V1 0A E5 4 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33034 A1 1 Printer APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS Appendix 1 describes the printer specifications and supplies for use on the B SX4T printer 1 1 Printer The following is the printer specifications Supply voltage Power consumption During a print job During standby Operating temperature range Relative humidity Resolution Printing method Printing speed Available media width including backing paper Effective print width max Issue mode LCD Message display Dimension W x D x H
101. BA TEC specified ribbons 2 avoid ribbon wrinkles use a ribbon which is wider than the media by 5 mm or more However too much difference in width between the two may cause wrinkles 3 When using a 112 mm wide media be sure to use a 108 mm wide ribbon Use of other ribbons may cause ribbon wrinkles 4 When using 134 mm wide media be sure to use a 130 mm wide ribbon Use of other ribbons may cause ribbon wrinkles B SX4T Proper media width 30 to 36 mm 3610 45 mm 45to63mm 63 79 71 112 B SX5T Ribbon width 134 mm 172 Proper media width 30 36 mm 36to 45 mm 45 63mm 63to 97 mm 97 to 140 mm 0 2 NOTE When purchasing ribbon locally they must meet the above size There be TOSHIBA TEC approved ribbons which do not fall within the above size however they have no functional problem B SX4T 41 112 mm B SX5T 41 134 mm 2 SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS EO10 33013A 2 3 CARE AND HANDLING OF THE MEDIA AND RIBBON O 7 This inked surface faces the outside This ribbon should be wound at center of the core End tape Leader tape Ink ribbon Non transmissive Adhesive tape Adhesive tape Adhesive tape Ink outside Treated back side 2 3 CARE AND HANDLING OF THE MEDIA AND RIBBON CAUTION Be sure to read carefully and understand the Supply Manual Use only media and ribbon which meet specified requirements Use of non specified
102. Black the RESTART key Mark on the media Size of the loaded media is different Replace the loaded media with one from the programmed size that matches the programmed size then press the RESTART key or turn the printer off and then on select a programmed size that matches the loaded media Finally resend the print job The Feed Gap Sensor cannot Refer to Section 5 4 to set the distinguish the print area from a label threshold If this does not solve the gap problem turn off the printer and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative CUTTER ERROR The media is jammed in the cutter Remove the jammed media Then press Only when the cutter the RESTART key If this does not module is installed on solve the problem turn off the printer and the printer call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative E5 1 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 5 2 Possible Problems 5 1 Error Messages Cont PAPER 1 The media has run out 1 Load new media Then press the RESTART key 2 The media is not loaded properly 2 Reload the media correctly Then press the RESTART key 3 The media is slack 3 Take up any slack in the media RIBBON ERROR The ribbon is not fed properly Remove the ribbon and check the status of the ribbon Replace the ribbon if necessary If the problem 15 not solved turn off the printer and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representa
103. Block Cover Head Lever Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 4 Turn the Locking Ring counterclockwise and remove the Supply Holder from the Supply Shaft Me i Locking Ring Supply Shaft Supply Holder E2 6 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 7 Loading the Media 3 Cont NOTE Do not over tighten the Locking Ring of the Supply Holder Media ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 7 Loading the Media Put the media on the Supply Shaft Pass the media around the Damper then pull the media towards the front of the printer Align the projection of the Supply Holder with the groove of the Supply Shaft and push the Supply Holder against the media until the media is held firmly in place This will center the media automatically Then turn the Locking Ring clockwise to secure the Supply Holder Damper Groove Supply Holder Projection Supply Shaft In case of a label rolled with the print side facing inside EO Locking Ring Damper Place the media between the Media Guides adjust the Media Guides to the media width and tighten the Locking Screw Check that the media path through the printer is straight The media should be centered under the Print Head Supply Holder Media Guide Print Head Locking Screw Media Guide Media E2 7 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 7 Loading the Media Cont NOTE Be sure to set the black mark sensor t
104. Cut mode FEED TYPECHIPEEL SET Strip mode After selecting the Issue Mode press the PAUSE key to go to Label Length Setting NOTE Cut mode is available only when the optional cutter module B 4205 QM or B 8204 QM is installed Strip mode is available only when the optional strip module B 9904 is installed 9 45 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 6 TEST PRINT Label Length Setting Select the label length for the test print in a range from 5 mm to 999 mm LATEST PARENT LABEL LEN 76mm RINT LEN 999 RESTART FEED 9 LEN 5mm FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes 1 mm change up to 5 mm RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 1 mm change up to 999 mm After selecting the label length press the PAUSE key to go to Paper Feed Selection NOTE Pressing and holding the RESTART or FEED key causes the display to show the values quickly and continuously To stop it release the key Paper Feed Selection Select whether or not a paper feed is performed prior to a test print lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PAPER FEED PAPER FEED Paper feed is available FEED PAPER NO FEED Paper feed is not available After selecting the paper feed press the PAUSE key The display returns to the lt 4 gt TEST PRINT NOTE When PAPER FEED is selected the printer feeds the media prior to a test print to adjust the print start position When PAPER NO FEED
105. DIA B SX4T Unit mm Label dispensing mode mode strip mode Rotary cutter 2 Swing cutter Item Media eile 10 0 1500 0 25 4 1500 0 3 sec 6 sec 38 0 1500 0 38 0 1500 0 10 0 1500 0 8 sec 6 sec 30 0 1500 0 25 4 1500 0 abel length 8 0 1498 0 23 4 1498 0 3 sec 67 32 0 1494 0 25 0 1494 0 1 L 2 0 10 0 10 0 104 0 3 sec 6 sec 30 0 1492 0 Tag 1 80 14980 3 sec 6 sec 28 0 1496 0 0 13 0 17 1361 0 2200 See NOTE 9 Roll direction Inside Inner core diameter 276 2 0 3 B SX5T Unit mm Label dispensing mode patch mode Strip mode ltem Rotary cutter Swing cutter 10 0 1500 0 25 4 1500 0 38 0 1500 0 38 0 1500 0 Media pitch 3 sec 5 30 0 1500 0 2 0 10 0 10 0 128 0 Effective print length 3 5 sec 28 0 1496 0 1 0 2 SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS EO10 33013A 2 1 MEDIA NOTES 1 2 12 13 To ensure print quality and print head use only TOSHIBA TEC specified media The media length specifications for use of the cutter are 1 When issuing label using the swing cutter label length should be 35 0 mm Gap length 2 2 rotary cutter does not support the print speed of 10 sec When marking black marks on the label rolls they should be marked at the gaps On the
106. DJ lt T gt 0 To change the screen to the Print Tone Fine Adjustment Thermal direct print press the FEED key again KS ADJUST SET TONE ADJ D 40 Thermal Direct When the LCD display shows TONE ADJ lt T gt or TONE ADJ lt D gt press the PAUSE key to start And then use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option Thermal Transfer Print Thermal Direct Print x BIO Darker E SEU RESTART ds ei Standard FEED 75 E pit Lighter 10 FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 1 tone change up to 10 tones RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes 1 tone change up to 10 tones After completing the fine adjustment press the PAUSE key NOTES 1 The fine adjustment value equals to the sum of the fine adjustment values set by the PC command and this parameter The maximum print tone fine adjustment value is 10 thermal transfer print or 7 10 thermal direct print When the value reached the maximum the value remains unchanged even if the subsequent fine adjustment is performed This is useful when print tone is required to be fine adjusted e g When the ribbon is changed to different type 5 39 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT 5 5 6 Ribbon Motor Voltage Fine Adjustment Feed Take up Motor With this parameter you can fine adjust the Ribbon Motor Voltage Torque When lt 8 gt ADJUST
107. DJUSTMENT While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Message appears lt 1 gt DIAG VX X Press the FEED key twice The printer is at the start of the Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment menu SO ADJUST SET NOTES 1 When pressing the FEED and RESTART keys at the same time in the parameter setting the message returns to lt 3 gt ADJUST SET 2 If holding the FEED or RESTART key for 0 5 seconds or longer in the Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment the key is entered continuously 3 A changed parameter becomes enabled by pressing the PAUSE 4 Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired value or option 5 5 1 Feed Length Fine Adjustment With this parameter you can fine adjust the feed length When lt 3 gt ADJUST SET appears press the PAUSE key ADUUST FEED ADJ 0 0 Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option FEED ADJ 50 0mm RESTART FEED ADJ 49 5mm FEED ADU SEO 5mm FEED ADJ jF0 Omm FEED ADJ 0 5mm FEED FEED ADJ 50 0mm FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 0 5mm change up to 50 0 mm RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 0 5mm change up to 50 0 mm After completing the fine adjustment press the PAUSE key 5 34 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARA
108. E Error detection Parity check Framing error Data entry code Receiving buffer Protocol EO10 33013A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS VRC Vertical Redundancy Checking This error occurs when no stop bit is found in the frame specified starting with the start bit ASCII 8 bit code for European characters 8 bit code for graphic B SXAT 1MB B SX5T 6MB XON XOFF DC1 DC3 protocol When initialized after power on this printer becomes ready to receive data and sends an XON code 11H Transmission or non transmission of XON code is selectable by means of the parameter setting he printer sends an XOFF code 13H when the free area in the receive buffer becomes 10K Bytes or less he printer sends an XON code 11H when the free area in the receive buffer are 512KB or more When there is no free area in the receive buffer the printer discards received data which exceeds the receive buffer capacity without storing it in the buffer After detecting the XOFF code the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer becomes full The printer sends an XOFF code 13H at power off time Transmission or non transmission of XOFF code is selectable with the parameter setting signal is always High level Ready RTS signal is always High level Ready READY BUSY protocol When initialized after power on this printer beco
109. E 3 1 OPENING CLOSING THE TOP COVER 3 1 OPENING CLOSING THE TOP COVER When opening the top cover fully open the top cover to the open position When closing softly close it to the close position 7 Open Position Close Position 3 2 REMOVING THE SIDE PANEL L 1 Remove the four B 4x5 screws from the side panel L Open the top cover and remove the three SMW 4x8 screws that secure the side panel L B 4x5 Screw 2 SMW 4x8 Screw B 4x5 Screw 3 Close the top cover 4 Lift the side panel L and put it aside 5 Release the fan motor harness from the cable clamp disconnect it from CN19 on the Main PC board and then separate the side panel L Main PC Board CN19 Side Panel L B Fan Motor Fan Motor Harness Cable Clamp 3 3 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A MAINTENANCE 3 3 OPENING CLOSING THE PRINTER BLOCK 3 3 OPENING CLOSING THE PRINTER BLOCK 1 Open the top cover 2 Turn the head lever counterclockwise to Free position 3 Open the ribbon shaft holder plate Head Lever Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 4 Raise the print head block until it stops Print Head Block pe Stopper NOTE excessively push down the print head block to close it Dosing so may cause a failure of the print head block or damage to the print head 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18
110. ES 1 Check for damage or scratches on the printer However please note that TOSHIBA TEC shall have no liability for any damage of any kind sustained during transportation of the product Keep the cartons and pads for future transportation of the printer E1 1 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1 4 Accessories ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 1 4 Accessories When unpacking the printer please make sure all the following accessories are supplied with the printer US Power Cord 1 pc P No FBCB0030203 QQ model only EU Power Cord 1 pc P No EKA 0030001 QP model only CD ROM 1 pc Fan Filter 1 pc QQ P No 7FM00331000 P No 0036801 QP P No 7FM00254000 E1 2 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1 5 Appearance 1 5 1 Dimensions 1 5 2 Front View 1 5 3 Rear View ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 1 5 Appearance The names of the parts or units introduced in this section are used in following chapters 291 11 5 460 18 1 308 12 1 Dimensions in mm inches LCD Message Display Top Cover Operation Panel gt Supply Window Media Outlet Parallel Interface PCMCIA Card Slot Option Connector Centronics USB Connector Option or LAN Connector Option USB Connector Option or LAN Serial Interface Connector Option Connector RS 232C Expansion I O Interface Connector Opt
111. GLOSSARIES Pre printed media A type of media on which characters logos and other designs have been already printed Print head element The thermal print head consists of a single line of tiny resistive elements and when current is allowed to flow through each element it heats up causing a small dot to be burned onto thermal paper or a small dot of ink to be transferred from a thermal ribbon to ordinary paper Print speed The speed at which printing occurs This speed is expressed in units of ips inches per second Reflective sensor See Black mark sensor Resolution The degree of detail to which an image can be duplicated The minimum unit of divided image is called a pixel As the resolution becomes higher the number of pixels increased resulting in more detailed image Ribbon An inked film used to transfer an image onto the media In the thermal transfer printing it is heated by the thermal print head causing an image to be transferred onto the media Strip mode A device used to remove labels from the backing paper Supply Media and ribbon Tag A type of media with no adhesive Usually tags are made of cardboard or other durable material ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 GLOSSARIES Thermal direct printing A printing method using no ribbon but thermal media which reacts to heat The thermal print head heats the thermal media directly causing print image to be printed on the media Thermal print head
112. ING MODULE B 9904 R QM option for the B SX4T 3 2 34 PCMCIA INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 PCM QM 3 2 3 5 EXPANSION I O INTERFACE BOARD B 7704 IO QM option for the B SX4T 3 2 3 6 BUILT IN LAN INTERFACE BOARD 9700 3 3 3 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM 3 3 This manual is intended for both B SX4T series B SX5T series Please note that the illustrations and pictures provided are of the B SX4T series CAUTION This manual may not be copied in whole or in part without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC The contents of this manual may be changed without notification Please refer to your local Authorised Service representative with regard to any queries you may have in this manual Copyright 2003 by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 570 Ohito Ohito cho Tagata gun Shizuoka ken JAPAN 1 EO10 33013A 1 1 1 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS OUTLINE 1 1 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS 1 2 Various bar codes characters and graphic data be printed using both thermal transfer and thermal direct methods This printer can also print writable characters and logos at designated coordinates by using a graphic command The Centronics and RS 232C are available as standard interfac
113. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 4 RIBBON SAVING MODULE B 9904 R QM 4 4 RIBBON SAVING MODULE B 9904 R QM All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below NOTE The ribbon saving module is standard on the B SX5T series Solenoid 1 pc RSV PC Board 1 pc Solenoid Harness 1 pc Locking Support 3 pcs e Installation Manual 1 copy SM 4x8 Screw 2 pcs 1 Remove the side panel L from the printer Refer to section 3 2 2 Remove the operation panel ass y from the printer Refer to section 3 4 3 Fit the three locking supports into the RSV PC board A J iro Locking Support RSV PC Board 4 Secure the RSV PC board to the printer with the locking support RSV PC Board Holes for securing the RSV PC Board Locking Support NOTE not push the center of the RSV PC board when attaching it to the printer Doing so may break the PC board Hold the locking supports and push them into the holes for securing the RSV PC board 4 17 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 4 RIBBON SAVING MODULE B 9904 R QM Insert folded tag paper 1 5 mm thick between the print head and the platen and then turn the 5 head lever to Lock position Insert the head up arm into the plunger of the solenoid While holding down the head up arm slightly lift the solenoid Secure the solenoid to the frame with the
114. ION 1 33036 2 1 Precautions 2 PRINTER SETUP This section outlines the procedures to setup your printer prior to its operation The section includes precautions connecting cables assembling accessories loading media and ribbon inserting the optional memory card and performing a test print 2 1 Precautions To insure the best operating environment and to assure the safety of the operator and the equipment please observe the following precautions Operate the printer on a stable level operating surface 1 a location free from excessive humidity high temperature dust vibration or direct sunlight Keep your work environment static free Static discharge can cause damage to delicate internal components Make sure that the printer is connected to a clean source of AC Power and that no other high voltage devices that may cause line noise interference are connected to the same mains Assure that the printer is connected to the AC mains with a three prong power cable that has the proper ground earth connection Do not operate the printer with the cover open Be careful not to allow fingers or articles of clothing to get caught into any of the moving parts of the printer especially the optional cutter mechanism Make sure to turn off the printer power and to remove the power cord from the printer whenever working on the inside of the printer such as changing the ribbon or loading the media or when cleaning the printer
115. ION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 18 33012 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 3 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 4 Remove the operation panel ass y Refer to Section 3 4 5 Open the print head block Refer to Section 3 3 6 Remove the two SMW 4x8 screws that secure the strip sensors TR and LED 7 Release the strip sensor LED harness from the cable clamp and disconnect it from the shorter harness of the strip sensor harness TR SMW 4x8 Screw SMW 4x8 Screw Strip Sensor TR Strip Sensor LED Shorter Harness of the Strip Sensor Harness for TR Cable Clamp Strip Sensor Harness lt for LED 8 Remove the expansion I O board from the printer temporarily using following procedure 1 Disconnect the expansion I O cable from CN1 on the Expansion I O board 2 Remove the two B 3x6 screws to detach the expansion I O board from the printer Expansion Board Rear Plate CN1 B 3x6 Screw Expansion I O Cable 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 9 Disconnect the shorter harness of the strip sensor harness TR from CN20 on the Main PC board Then remove the strip sensor TR from the printer NOTE Retain the strip sensors TR and LED and the strip sensor harness 10 Disconnect the longer harness of the rewind full sensor TR and rewinder harness from
116. L END TYPE1 ZZS PARAMETER SET CODE ESC LF NUL Label end selection FEED Control code selection RESTART FEED lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Pre strip selection RESTART BRE PEEL OFF OFF lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED PEEL OFF STS OFF Strip wait status selection p lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED BACK SPEED STD Back feed speed selection lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED FEED KEY FEED FEED key selection RESTART RESTART 5 16 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING NOTE Baud rate Data length Parity and Transmission control code should be set to the same values as those of the host computer Failure to do this causes improper operation While pressing the FEED and the PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x message appears lt 1 gt DIAG Press the FEED key The printer is the start of the Parameter Setting menu 5 4 1 Character Code Selection With this parameter you can select a character font code When lt 2 gt SET appears press the PAUSE key SET PONT CODE Posi Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option FEED After selecting the character code press the PAUSE key NOTES 1 When pressing th
117. LISH VERSION 1 33034 2 10 Test Print Press the PAUSE key and the issue mode setting display will appear Select the issue mode with the FEED or RESTART key A TEST PRINT CUT Press the PAUSE key and media size setting display will appear Select the media size with the FEED or RESTART key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT LABEL LEN 76mm Press the PAUSE key and the paper feed setting display will appear Select whether or not a paper feed 1s performed with the FEED or RESTART key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PAPER ee When the PAUSE key is pressed one blank media will be issued Then the LCD Message Display will return to showing the test print lt 4 gt TEST PRINT 22 a 2 a gt E C o ITI _ a lt lt Q e 5 ITI ITI lt lt When pressing PAUSE key the printer will print the specified issue counts of the lt 4 gt TEST PRINT SLANT LINE CIDOT y 7 3 gt 5 m m lt lt 9 gt C o m lt and the printer will print the specified issue counts of the slant lines 3 dots lt 4 gt TEST PRINT SLANT LINE 3DOT a un un 5 ET m m iT lt jal 5 U gt c o m and printer will print the specified
118. METER FINE ADJUSTMENT e Feed Length Fine Adjustment Example 0 0 mm Feed Direction wom A A 10 0 mm fey lt lt lt lt NOTE The fine adjustment value equals to the sum of the fine adjustment values set by the PC command and this parameter The maximum feed length fine adjustment value is 50 0 When the value reached the maximum the value remains unchanged even if the subsequent fine adjustment is performed 5 5 2 Cut Strip Position Fine Adjustment With this parameter you can fine adjust the cut or strip position When lt 8 gt ADJUST SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key SOPDADIOUST SET CUI ADJ 0 0mm Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option CUT ADJ 50 0mm RESTART CUT ADJ 0 0mm CURT Repos sees m FEED CUT ADJ 49 5mm CUT ADJ 50 0mm FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 0 5 change up to 50 0 mm RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 0 5mm change up to 50 0 mm After completing the fine adjustment press the PAUSE key 5 35 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT e Cut Position Fine Adjustment Example 30 xam Print Head Cut Position Tag Paper Feed Length a Black Mark NOTES 1 Cut issue is available only when the optional cutter unit B 7208 QM is installed 2 The f
119. NANCE PROCEDURE All machines are generally delivered in their best condition To maintain optimal operating condition and help gain maximum performance and life of machines we would recommend you to conduct periodic maintenance Doing this is also effective in preventing unexpected troubles and avoiding wasteful system down time by which more benefit is produced to your customers and greater reliance is placed on the product quality Please refer to the following general maintenance procedure and perform periodic servicing NOTE Before starting the periodic maintenance be sure to read carefully and understand the Service Manuals especially warnings cautions and adjustment Ask an operator or a manager about any machine trouble Check the run distance on the maintenance counter Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord Open the top cover Clean the inside of the printer 1 The entire inside of the printer should be cleaned 2 Wipe the platen capstan roller and pinch roller with a cloth moistened with alcohol 3 Clean the print head elements with the TOSHIBA TEC approved print head cleaner m eu c Capstan Roller Print Head ium Pinch Roller Media Path 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 18 33012 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 5 When using the cutter unit clean the cutter blade and the media path When cleaning the cutter be careful not to be injured by the cutter
120. NS gel Take up Spool aten Rewind Full Sensor Feed Gap Feed Sensor Roller F gt Strip Shaft 1 OUTLINE EO10 33013A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS 3 Auto cut mechanism Option When the cutter module is installed the backing paper of the label stock or tag paper is cut individually stop and cut Ribbon End Sensor Pinch Cutter Print Head 3 Roller ZN GL Feed Black Mark Roller Sensor 18 Power supply QQ model AC100 120 V 10 50 60Hz QP model AC220 240 V 10 50Hz 19 Current consumption B SX4T B SX5T QQ model QP model model QP model 133 W 1 6A 134W 1 0A 130 W 1 7A 124W 0 7A Stand by 14W 0 18A 14W 0 13A Stand by 15W 0 19A 16W 0 16A NOTE Be sure to provide an exclusive AC outlet for this machine 20 Rush current QQ model 11A QP model 14A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS HD6417709SF100B 2 Memory CTP FOQLAIN sruron Flash ROM 2 512 Byte EE PROM 3 Image buffer Work 8MB SD RAM BOK I 16MB SD RAM 3 Interface 1 RS 232C interface Communication mode Full duplex Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 115200 bps selectable Synchronization start stop synchronization 4 Transmission parameter Parity None EVEN ODD Start bit 1 bit Stop bit 1 bit or 2 bit Word length 7 bit or 8 bit 1 OUTLIN
121. ODE 21 RESTART FEED EURO CODE CODE NOTE Pressing the FEED RESTART key causes 1 byte change in Euro Code value After selecting the Euro font code press the PAUSE key 5 27 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 17 Auto Print Head Check Selection With this parameter you can select whether or not the Auto Print Head Check function is activated at the power on time When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 16 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET AUTO FIDE SG OFF Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option Auto print head broken element check is not RESTART performed Auto print head broken element check is M AUTO HD CHK ON performed NOTES 1 take about 2 seconds to perform the Auto Print Head check 2 It is recommended that this function is turned on when high quality printing such as bar codes printing is required otherwise turned off After selecting the auto print head check press the PAUSE key 5 4 18 Centronics Interface ACK BUSY Timing Selection With this parameter you can select the ACK BUSY timing of the Centronics interface When x22 PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 17 times SOZPARAMETER SEI ACK BUSY TXPEL Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART
122. PCMCIA card 2 14 PCMCIA interface board 2 14 A1 2 Platen 1 4 4 1 Power consumption 1 1 Power cord 1 2 2 4 POWER LED 1 4 3 1 Power switch 1 3 2 4 2 5 Pre printed media 4 3 5 4 Print head 1 4 4 1 Print head block 1 4 Printing method 1 1 Printing speed 1 1 R Reflective sensor 2 15 Al 4 Resolution 1 1 RESTART key 1 4 3 1 Ribbon 2 12 4 3 A1 5 Ribbon shaft 1 4 2 12 Ribbon stopper 1 4 2 12 Ribbon width 1 5 Rotation Al 1 RS 232C 1 3 2 3 A3 1 INDEX ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 INDEX S Serial interface 1 3 Strip mode 2 9 Strip module 2 9 1 2 Supply voltage 1 1 T Tag AI 2 Test print 2 15 Thermal direct 2 15 1 1 Thermal transfer 2 15 1 1 Threshold setting 5 4 Transmissive sensor 2 15 A1 3 Two dimensional code 1 1 U USB interface 1 3 2 3 1 2 W Weight 1 1 0 33015 SUPPLEMENT FOR 5 MANUAL TEC B SX4T and B SX5T SERIES This supplement is applicable to the following Owner s Manuals 5 4 Series EO1 33034 B SX5T Series 1 33036 Precautions for using the Ribbon Saving Function The ribbon saving module is standard on the B SX5T series but not on the B SX4T series Also the ribbon saving function has been set to off by the parameter setting when the printer is delivered Therefore to use the ribbon saving function on the B SX4T series it is necessary to install the B 9904 R QM optional ribbon saving module and to enable t
123. QM PCMCIA Interface Board B 8204 QM Rotary Cutter B 9700 LAN QM LAN Interface Board B 9904 H QM Strip Module B 9700 USB QM USB Interface Board B 9904 R QM Ribbon Saving Module 7704 Expansion Interface Board In this section installation procedures for these optional equipments are described NOTES 1 The B 4205 QM B 8204 QM and B 9904 H QM cannot be used together 2 The B 9700 LAN QM and the B 9700 USB QM cannot be used together 3 When using the B 9700 PCM QM together with the B 9700 LAN QM or the B 9700 USB QM attach the B 9700 PCM QM onto the Main PC board 4 The strip module ribbon saving module and expansion I O interface board are standard on the B SX5T series 5 When installing the B 4205 QM swing cutter module or B 8204 QM rotary cutter module on the B SX5T series it is necessary to remove the strip sensor rewinder harness rewind full sensor harness expansion I O interface board etc Follow the procedure below 1 Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord 2 When the printer is used in the batch or strip mode Remove the two black screws to detach the front plate NOTE Retain the two black screws and front plate 5 When the printer is used in the built in rewinder mode Busen Open the top cover remove the two SMW 4x8 screws and detach the rewinder guide plate from the printer SMW 4x8 Rewinder Guide Plate SMW 4x8 INSTALLAT
124. RAM CLEAR PAUSE No RAM Clear A FEED RESTART SoZRAM CEEAR MATNIESGNT FEED RESTART lt 6 gt RAM CLEAR PARAMETER CLEAR arameter Clear FEED RESTART Maintenance Counter Clear While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Message appears lt 1 gt DIAG VX X Press the FEED key 5 times The printer is at the start of the RAM Clear menu lt 6 gt RAM CLEAR 5 8 1 RAM Clear Menu Selection When lt 6 gt RAM CLEAR appears press the PAUSE key Select the RAM Clear menu among No RAM Clear Maintenance Counter Clear or Parameter Clear NO RAM CLEAR RAM Clear is not performed RESTART MAINTE CNT CLEAR Clears the Maintenance Counter PARAMETER CLEAR Clears the Parameter NOTES 1 To exit the RAM clear menu selection press the FEED and RESTART keys at the same The display returns to lt 6 gt RAM CLEAR 2 After RAM clear the following items are still stored Label distance covered Sensor adjustment value address Language for the LCD message data in the flash memory and data in the ATA card FEED 5 55 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 8 RAM CLEAR 5 8 2 No RAM Clear NO RAM CLEAR Press the PAUSE key No RAM Clear operation is performed and the display returns to lt 6 gt RAM CLEAR Pressing the PAUSE key again causes the display to
125. RESTART Unavailable FEED TRACE ON Available FEED key is pressed TRACE ON PAUSE Trace specification selection is completed by pressing the PAUSE key lt 8 gt BASIC 5 62 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 11 DOWN LOAD MODE 5 11 DOWNLOAD MODE In this mode the printer enables downloading While pressing the FEED PAUSE and RESTART keys at the same time turn on the printer RESTART DOWNLOAD MODE Select DOWNLOAD or DOWNLOAD MODE with the FEED or RESTART key FEED DOWNLOAD MODE 2 Press the PAUSE key to start downloading DOWNLOAD MDOE 2 We RECEIVING Printer is receiving data DOWNLOAD MDOE 2 ERASING Printer is erasing data in the Flash ROM 2 Printer is writing data into the Flash ROM DOWNLOAD MDOE 2 bz RECEIVING Printer is receiving data 4 Printer is writing data into the Flash ROM ON LINE ee When downloading is completed the printer reboots and restores in ON LINE status automatically NOTE Centronics Interface ACK BUSY timing is different between DOWNLOAD MODE and DOWNLOAD MODE 27 If data cannot be downloaded in DOWNLOAD MODE select DOWNLOAD MODE 2 and retry downloading 5 63 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 ON LINE MODE 6 ON LINE MODE In the ON LINE mode the following settings can be performed Threshold Setting for the Feed Gap Sensor Threshold S
126. RMAT ERROR the flash memory ATA card 12 RIBBON ERROR Data cannot be stored because the flash O O Odi RI 0 08 Display of error command error has occurred in messaged See Notes analyzing the command o JA power failure has occurred JA flash memory card is being initialised HOOBASE LAN 100 Base LAN Board is being INITIALIZING initialized EA2 1 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS NOTES e f a command error is found in the command received 16 bytes of the command error starting from the command code will be displayed However LF and NUL will not be displayed Example 1 ESC T20 G30 LF NUL Command error The following message appears T206 0 B 5A5T V1 0A Example 2 ESC XR 0200 0300 0450 1200 1 LF NUL Command error The following message appears XR 0200 0300 045 B5 Re VI SUA Example 3 ESC PC001 0A00 0300 2 2 A 00 B LF NUL Command error The following message appears 1 0300 B SA 1 When the error command is shown 3FH appears for codes other than codes 20H to 7FH and to EA2 2 APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE B Interface Cables To prevent rad
127. Ribbon Motor Sensor Take up Ribbon Sensor Plate Take up 10 13 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 6 RIBBON MOTOR SENSORS TAKE UP FEED 5 Replace the ribbon motor sensor take up with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e Attach the ribbon motor sensor take up to the ribbon sensor plate take up in the correct direction e Fit the positioning tabs of the ribbon sensor plate take up into the positioning holes of the ribbon motor block Ribbon Sensor Plate Take up Ribbon Motor Block Positioning Tab Positioning Hole e Make sure that the gear with slits passes between the sensor portions Gear with Slits Sensor Portion NOTE This photo was taken from the gear side for being visible 10 14 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 6 RIBBON MOTOR SENSORS TAKE UP FEED 10 6 2 Ribbon Motor Sensor Feed 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Disconnect the sensor harness from the ribbon motor sensor ass y feed NOTE The other end of the sensor harness is connected to CN51 on the Main PC board 3 Remove the SMW 3x6 screw to detach the ribbon motor sensor ass y feed Ribbon Motor Sensor Ass y Feed SMW 3x6 Screw Sensor Harness 4 Detach the ribbon motor sensor feed from the ribbon sensor plate feed in the following steps NOTE The ribbon motor sensor feed is attached to th
128. Round holes are not acceptable A1 3 3 Detection Area of the Reflective Sensor The Reflective Sensor is movable from the centre to the left edge of media The reflection factor of the Black Mark must be 10 or lower with a waveform length of 950 nm The Reflective Sensor should be aligned with the centre of the Black Mark Centre of media Min 2 0 mm i gt Detecting the black marks on the back Min 12 mm Sensor should be positioned at the centre of the black mark N Media feed direction Sensor is movable within this range A1 3 4 Effective Print Area The figure below illustrates the relation between the head effective print width and media width Out of print range 71 of print range 104 mm 0 2 4 mm Head Effective Print Range 4mm 112 mm Max media width EA1 4 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 A1 4 Ribbon A1 3 4 Effective Print Area Cont The figure below shows the effective print area on the media Area to be detected Start line Media height 10 1500 mm 1 5 mm from the left edge of media 1 5 mm from the right edge of media J Media feed direction Area to be detected Media width backing paper width is not included NOTES Be sure not to print on the 1 5 wide area from the media edges shaded area in the above figure Printing this area may cause ribbon wrinkles resulting in a poor print quality of t
129. SH Flash memory card is inserted NO Unformatted ATA card Flash memory Slot card or no card is inserted PCMCIA Card 7 Sensor 1 Check The status of the Strip Sensor Ribbon Feed Motor Sensor Ribbon Take up Motor Sensor Rewinder Overflow Sensor Cutter Home Position Sensor Print Head Up Sensor and Print Block Open Sensor are printed SENSOR1 00000000 0 11100 1 L Printer block open sensor status Fixed to 0 1 Print head close Printer head up sensor status 1 Head down Cutter home position sensor status 0 Home position 1 Other position Rewinder overflow sensor status 0 Normal 1 Overflow Ribbon take up motor sensor status 0 The detecting point is positioned outside the slit 1 The detecting point is positioned inside the slit Ribbon feed motor sensor status 0 The detecting point is positioned outside the slit 1 The detecting point is positioned inside the slit Fixed to O otrip sensor status 0 The label is not detected 1 The label is detected 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST Sensor Switch Print status content description Printer block open sensor Detects the Open or Close status of the printer block When the printer block is closed printing is performed Print head up sensor Detects the Up or Down status of the print head When the print head is down printing is performed Cutter home position sensor Indicates whether or not the cutter is at th
130. Saving Function Selection With this parameter you can select the ribbon saving function When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 10 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET RIBBON SAVE ON Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option After selecting the Ribbon Saving Function press the PAUSE key NOTE When setting this function to ON be sure to install the ribbon saving module option B SX4T Failure to do this may slacken the ribbon causing print failures 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 12 Control Code Selection With this parameter you can select a Control Code When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 11 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET AUTO Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option 1 CODE AUTO Automatic selection RESTART ODE ESC LF NUL Manual selection FEED CODE Manual selection CODE MANUAL Control codes should be specified NOTES 1 This parameter is used to select the Control Code for the communication between the printer and the host computer 2 Selecting Manual enables you to set the control code 4 When CODE MANUAL is selected and the PAUSE key is pressed the LCD display will show the setting screen of CONTROL CODE1 to CONTROL CODES as follows lt 2 gt PAR
131. Section 5 4 Parameter Setting 5 4 2 Zero Font Code Selection With this parameter you can select the way to indicate zero between 0 and 2 When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET ZERO FONT 0 Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED RESTART key to select desired option RESTART ZERO FONT 0 Without slash FEED ZERO FONT With slash After selecting the zero font code press the PAUSE key NOTE The following fonts do not support a zero with slash Bit Map Font OCR A OCR B GOTHIC 725 Black Outline Font Price Font 1 Price Font 2 Price Font 3 DUTCH 801 Bold BRUSH 738 Regular GOTHIC 725 Black True Type Font 5 20 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 3 Baud Rate Selection With this parameter you can select the baud rate of the RS 232C interface When 22 PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key twice lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET SPEED 9600bps Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option 115200 bps RESTART 38400 bps 19200 bps 9600 bps FEED 4800 bps SPEED 2400 bps pes mco Or wry Oll U Ty Fy Oy OT OT After selecting the baud rate press the PAUSE key 5 4 4 Data Length Selection With this pa
132. Shaft Pad Tape Tape Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate Tape 6 Incase of the B SX5T series take out the rewinder guide plate and two SMW 3x8 screws from the printer inside Also remove the tape from the rewinder unit in the printer SMW 4x8 Screw Rewinder Guide Plate NOTE For the installation procedure of the rewinder guide plate refer to Section 4 3 1 2 1 UNPACKING 18 33012 1 2 CHECKS 1 2 CHECKS 1 Check for damage or scratches on the printer 2 Confirm that none of the accessories are missing The parts below are provided as accessories Warranty Registration QQ model only Power Cord Fan Filter QC Card QQ model only Ferrite Core B SX5T series only CD ROM Cable Band B SX5T series only NOTE Keep the carton and pads for later transport 2 PRINTER INSTALLATION 1 Place the printer on the level surface 2 Keepthe slit free or the printer will be overheated Also keep enough space for replacing and maintenance works while the top cover is opened Left Side Cover Top Cover 1 3 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A MAINTENANCE 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE WARNING 1 Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord before replacing the main parts 2 Never perform disassembling assemblin
133. Top Cover Turn the Head Lever to Free position then release the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate CAUTION Do not allow any hard objects to touch the Print Head or Platen as this may cause damage to them n Do not use any volatile Open the Print Head Block Remove the ribbon and media Clean the Print Head Element with a Print Head Cleaner or a cotton swab or soft cloth slightly moistened with alcohol o co OND Pinch Roller solvent including thinner and benzene as this Print Head ae may cause discoloration to cover print failure Print Head or breakdown of Element printer Do not touch the Print Head Element with bare Platen 77 Feed Roller hands as static may 4 gt Be sure to use the Print 4 Head Cleaner enclosed Black Mark Sensor with this printer Failure Feed Gap Sensor to do this may shorten the Print Head life 7 Wipe the Platen Feed Roller and Pinch Roller with a soft cloth slightly moistened with alcohol Remove dust or foreign substances from the internal part of the printer 8 Wipe the Feed Gap Sensor and Black Mark Sensor with a dry soft cloth NOTE Please purchase the Print Head Cleaner P No 24089500013 from your authorised TOSHIBA TEC service representative E4 1 4 MAINTENANCE ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 4 1 Cleaning 4 1 2 Covers and Panels Wip
134. a LAN network CAUTION 1 Loosen the two M 3x5 screws of the LAN interface board before installing it Failure to do this may cause damage to the connector M 3x5 Screw 2 When using the PCMCIA interface board together first install the PCMCIA PC board and then LAN interface board License Agreement Please be sure to read the License Agreement before opening the sealed LAN Interface Board If you do not agree with the License Agreement please do not use this product Your unpacking the product indicates your approval for the License Agreement NOTE When both B 9700 LAN QM and B 9700 PCM QM are installed inserting a LAN PC card into the slot of the B 9700 PCM QM disables the 9700 All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below LAN Interface Board 1pc PCB Attachment Plate e Installation Manual 1 copy e License Agreement 1 copy e SM 3x6 Screw 4 pcs NOTE When using the PCMCIA interface board 9700 together the PCB attachment plate will be used 4 27 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 7 LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM 1 Loosen the two M 3x5 screws of the LAN interface board Refer to Caution above 2 Remove the side panel from the printer Refer to section 3 2 3 Remove the two SM 3x6 screws to remove the blind plate A from the back Blind Plate A SM 3x6 Screw NOTE Keep the
135. abel End press the PAUSE key 5 31 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 26 Pre Strip Selection With this parameter you can select whether or not the Pre Strip function is activated When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 25 times lt 7 gt PARAMETER SET PRE PEEL Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART Unavailable DASS After selecting the Pre Strip press the PAUSE key NOTE When the print speed is set to 10 sec the pre strip function will be activated regardless of this parameter setting 5 4 27 Back Feed Speed Selection With this parameter you can select the speed of back feed When lt 2 gt SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 26 times lt Z gt PARAMETER BACK SPEED STD Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART BACK SPEED STD STD 3 inch second FEED BACK SPEED LOW LOW 2 inch second After selecting the Back Feed Speed press the PAUSE key 5 32 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT Outline of Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment In the Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment mode you can fine adjust each parameter such as Print tone Print start position Thres
136. afe handling are included in this manual warnings and cautions contained in this manual should be read and understood before handling or maintaining the equipment Do not attempt to effect repairs or modifications to this equipment If a fault occurs that cannot be rectified using the procedures described in this manual turn off the power unplug the machine then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Meanings of Each Symbol This symbol indicates warning items including cautions Specific warning contents are drawn inside the A symbol The symbol on the left indicates a general caution This symbol indicates prohibited actions prohibited items Specific prohibited contents are drawn inside or near the symbol The symbol on the left indicates no disassembling This symbol indicates actions which must be performed Specific instructions are drawn inside or near the symbol The symbol on the left indicates disconnect the power cord plug from the outlet This indicates that there is the risk of death or serious injury if the WARNI NG machines are improperly handled contrary to this indication Any other than the Do not use voltages other than specified AC voltage the voltage AC specified on the is prohibited Disconnect the plug rating plate as this may cause fire or electric shock If the machines share the same outlet with any other electrical appliances that co
137. ain the printer performance and print quality please clean the printer regularly or whenever the media or ribbon is replaced 4 1 1 Print Head Platen Turn off the power and unplug the printer Sensors Open the Top Cover Turn the Head Lever to Free position then release the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate CAUTION Do not allow any hard objects to touch the Print Head or Platen as this may cause damage to them 1 Do not use any volatile Open Print Head Block Remove the ribbon and media Clean the Print Head Element with a Print Head Cleaner or a cotton swab or soft cloth slightly moistened with alcohol O 0I gt C9 ND Pinch Roller solvent including thinner UE i and benzene as this Print Head may cause discoloration to the cover print failure Print Head or breakdown of the Element printer Do not touch the Print Head Element with bare Platen Feed Roller hands as static may E damage the Print Head Be sure to use the Print Head Cleaner enclosed Black Mark Sensor with this printer Failure Feed Gap Sensor to do this may shorten the Print Head life 7 Wipe the Platen Feed Roller and Pinch Roller with a soft cloth slightly moistened with alcohol Remove dust or foreign substances from the internal part of the printer 8 Wipe the Feed Gap Sensor and Black Mark Sensor with a dry soft cloth NOTE Please purchase the Pri
138. and then take corrective action 8 Replace the following parts periodically if necessary The following table shows approximate product life for each part of replacement 3 Plaen 7FM00163000 2 3 4 NOTES 1 The above values of the cutter life are obtained on condition that the periodically maintained cutter is used with TOSHIBA TEC approved supplies by the proper method described in the manuals 2 The above values differ depending on the thickness and substances of the media to be used When using the cutter to cut the labels be sure to cut the backing paper Failure to do this may cause the glue to stick to the cutter and shorten the cutter life 9 Confirm each part adjustment Make any necessary adjustments 8 3 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE EO18 33012A 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 10 Conduct the following tests and make sure that there is no problem 1 2 3 4 5 6 Print test with TOSHIBA TEC approved media and ribbon Print tone print head position etc Paper skew When the Strip Module is used If the label skews when using the built in Rewinder unit turn the adjustment knob of the rewinder guide plate to correct the label feed Clockwise turn moves the rewinder guide plate forward and counterclockwise turn moves it backward e When labels skew to the right Loosen the SM 4x8 screw with a phillips head screwdriver Turn the adjustment knob clockwi
139. ap Sensor Adjustment No Paper lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ PEJRI 0VT4 8V Status detected by the Feed Gap Sensor paper Status detected by the Black Mark Sensor No paper Follow the Black Mark Sensor no paper Feed Gap Sensor no paper adjustment procedure below 1 Remove any paper from the detecting area of the Black Mark Sensor and the Feed Gap Sensor 2 Press and hold the RESTART or FEED key for more than 3 seconds lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ ON SS Ve When the adjustment is completed appears 3 Press the PAUSE key to show the current Ribbon End Sensor status 5 7 5 Ribbon End Sensor Adjustment lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ LRIBBON 0 31 Status detected by the Ribbon End Sensor Follow the Ribbon End Sensor adjustment procedure below 1 Place the ribbon in the B SX series printer so that the Ribbon End Sensor detects it 2 Press and hold the RESTART or FEED key for more than 3 seconds lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ LRIBBON 0 3V L When the adjustment is completed appears 3 Press the PAUSE key to return to lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ display 5 54 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 8 RAM CLEAR 5 8 RAM CLEAR Outline of RAM Clear In the RAM Clear mode clearing the Maintenance Counter and initializing the Parameters are possible After replacing the print head ribbon motor or platen perform a maintenance clear The RAM Clear menu contains the following SOF
140. aper feed is performed with the FEED or RESTART key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PAPER FEED When the PAUSE key is pressed one blank media will be issued Then the LCD Message Display will return to showing the test print lt 4 gt TEST PRINT v eo 2 zi a D S o m ve e E 5 rm m gt SH lt lt When pressing PAUSE key the printer will print the specified issue counts of the C4 gt EST PRINT SLANT LINE 7 3 2 24 gt A m m em Q mU lt lt gt 9 gt Im S lt and the printer will print the specified issue counts of the slant lines 3 dots GES PRINT SLANT LENE CSBOT C un un m m lt e gt eu U gt c and printer will print the specified issue counts of the characters of various sizes lt 4 gt TEST PRINT CHARACTERS C DN un S Ti m m z lt e e U gt c O 52 and printer will print the specified issue counts of the bar codes A eo PRINT BARCODE Press the FEED key and PAUSE key and the printer will print the specified issue counts of blank labels lt 4 gt TEST PRINT NON PRINTING Press the PAUSE key and the LCD Message Display will return to showing the test pri
141. ard Replace the MAIN PC board LED or LCD does Failure of the panel PC board Replace the panel PC board or not light operation panel operation panel Failure of the operation panel Replace the operation panel harness harness Replace the MAIN PC board Failure of the MAIN PC board Poor printing Poor media quality Use the media approved by TOSHIBA TEC Dirty print head Clean the print head The print head block is not set Close the print head block completely completely Printer does not Print head failure Replace the print head print Connection of the print head Connect the harness completely or connector is incomplete a bad replace the harness contact or broken elements Failure in rewinding feeding of the Replace the ribbon take up motor ribbon ribbon feed motor or MAIN PC board Failure of the MAIN PC board Replace the MAIN PC board Failure of the software Check the program Failure of the printer cable the printer cable Dot missing Broken print head element Replace the print head Broken print head cable wires Replace the print head harness Failure of the MAIN PC board Replace the MAIN PC board Blurred print Poor media quality Use only TOSHIBA TEC approved media Dust is on the media Clean the print head and remove any dust from the media 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 18 33012 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Ribbon wrinkle Media feed failure Communication error Poor ribbon quality
142. ars lt 1 gt DIAG MX X Press the FEED key 8 times The printer is at the start of the BASIC setting menu lt 8 gt BASIC When lt 8 gt BASIC appears press the PAUSE key 5 10 1 Basic Specification Selection Mode Select whether the Basic specification is enable or not BASIC ENABLE PAUSE BASIC OPE 1 BASIC ON or BASIC OFF is selected each time the RESTART FEED RESTART or FEED key is pressed BASIC ON Basic specification selection is completed by pressing the PAUSE PAUSE key FILE MAINTENANCE 5 61 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 10 BASIC SETTING 5 10 2 Basic File Browser Data files in the program file and basic file area are displayed When lt 8 gt BASIC appears press the PAUSE key then RESTART key FILE MAINTENANCE PAUSE OU TEST BAS Program file is displayed RESTART 01 TEST DAT Data file is displayed RESTART Data files in the BASIC file area are displayed each time the RESTART key is pressed i 00 TEST BAS Program file is displayed PAUSE Basic file browser is completed by pressing the PAUSE key Y BASIC TRACE 5 10 3 Basic Trace Selection Mode Select whether the Basic trace specification is enable or not When lt 8 gt BASIC appears press the PAUSE key then RESTART key twice BASIC TRAGE PAUSE TRACE OFF TRACE ON or TRACE OFF is RESTART TRACE OFF selected each time the
143. as the media sensors can be moved from the centre to the left edge of the media e The strip module ribbon saving module and expansion I O interface board are provided on this printer as standard When the optional interface board is installed Web functions such as remote maintenance and other advanced network features are available e Superior hardware including the specially developed 12 dots mm 306 dots inch thermal print head which will allow very clear print at a printing speed of 76 2 mm sec 3 inches sec 127 0 mm sec 5 inches sec or 203 2 mm sec 8 inches sec e Besides the optional Cutter Module there are also an optional PCMCIA Interface Board LAN Interface Board and the USB Interface Board 1 3 Unpacking Unpack the printer as per the Unpacking Instructions supplied with the printer NOTES 1 Check for damage or scratches on the printer However please note that TOSHIBA TEC shall have no liability for any damage of any kind sustained during transportation of the product Keep the cartons and pads for future transportation of the printer E1 1 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 1 4 Accessories 1 4 Accessories When unpacking the printer please make sure all the following accessories are supplied with the printer O US Power Cord 1 pc EU Power Cord 1 pc P No FBCB0030203 P No EKA 0030001 model only QP model only CD ROM 1 pc Fan Filter
144. ash memory prior to being shipped to the customer However if specifications should change at a later date this software will allow downloading firmware updates to the B SX series printer 7 2 DOWNLOAD PROGRAM INSTALLATION Before you can communicate from your PC to the B SX series printer you must first copy the Download Program for B SX from the two FDKs provided to the hard disk of your PC This program allows you to download the firmware Boot program Application program and Character generator to the B SX series printer SETUP DISK 1 2 Download Program for B SX WR FD SX DL SETUP 1st November 2002 7 00289 V001 000 Copyright 2002 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 7 2 1 System Requirements system e IBM Compatible PC running Windows 95 or Windows 98 e Installed memory of 16MB minimum 32MB recommended e Available Hard Disk space of 10MB or more NOTE Windows 3 16 is not supported Windows 3 1 Windows 958 and Windows 980 are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation Interface The RS 232C interface and Centronics interface 7 1 7 PROGRAM DOWN LOAD 18 33012 7 3 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD 7 2 2 Setup Setup Disk Make sure that you have all two diskettes available of the Download Program for B SX Installation Procedure 1 While running Windows 95 or Windows 98 insert Setup Disk 1 2 into the PC floppy drive 2 Click on the START button then highlig
145. ber of unprinted media Up to 9999 in pieces 3 92 5 5 ATA Card s remaining memory to 9999999 in bytes 4 Flash memory card remaining memory for PC save area 0 to 895 in K bytes 5 amp amp amp amp Remaining flash memory capacity for storing writable characters 0 to 3147 in K bytes pene Restoration by Acceptance of LCD Message Printer Status RESTART ke 422 POWER ONLINE ERROR LINE O JInonlinemode In Inonlinemode mode Yes ON LINE onune In online mode The printer in a communication 2 i head block is opened in ee The printer is paused Yes A parity overrun or framing error has 4 COMMS ERROR occurred during communication through 5 2326 5 PAPER JAM O The media is jammed during paper feed Yes Yes _ CUTTER EBBOB ES problem has occurred with the cutter Yes Yes module 7 NO PAPER The media has run out or the media 15 Yes Yes not loaded properly NO RIBBON O O The ribbon has run out Yes Yes HEAD OPEN Feed or printing was attempted with Yes Yes print head block open HEAD ERROR e O There is a problem with the print head Yes Yes EXCESS HEAD TEMP The print head is overheated The ribbon has been torn A problem Yes Yes has occurred with the sensor determines the torque
146. ca medium 9 15 18 point Helvetica bold 18 21 point Helvetica Italic 18 point Presentation bold 27 point Letter Gothic medium 14 3 point B SX5T 1 9 19 0 919 Times Roman medium 8 10 point Times Roman bold 10 12 14 point Times Roman Italic 12 point Helvetica medium 6 10 12 point Helvetica bold 12 14 point Helvetica Italic 12 point Presentation bold 18 point Letter Gothic medium 9 5 point 10 Character code 1 PC 850 2 PC 8 3 PC 852 4 PC 857 5 Arabic 6 LATIN9 7 PC 1257 8 PC 1254 9 PC 1253 10 PC 1252 11 PC 1251 11 Character magnification 1 Regular font 0 5 9 5 times magnified by 0 5 times in each direction 2 Outline font 2 0 85 0 mm magnified 0 1 mm in each direction NOTE When the outline font size is large the ribbon may wrinkle according to the quality of the ribbon or print tone Min Module Width mm Magnification times ion times The width of one cell can be changed in a range of 1 to 99 dots 15 Prestige Elite medium 10 5 point Prestige Elite bold 15 point Courier medium 15 point Courier bold 18 point OCR A B 12 point Outline font Helvetica bold Helvetica bold proportional Price Font 1 2 3 Times roman proportional Pop Proportional Proportional Writable characters 2 byte character is available Prestige Elite medium 7 point Prestige Elite bold 10 point Courier medium 10 point Co
147. careful not to pinch the cutter harness by the cutter cover Cutter Screw Cutter Cover Cutter Attachment Screw 12 Reassemble the side panel L and close the top cover Finally check the cutter operation NOTE For cleaning the cutter refer to section 8 4 6 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 2 ROTARY CUTTER B 8204 QM 4 2 ROTARY CUTTER 8204 Cutter Blade This optional device is used for cut print which cannot be used together with either 4205 or B 4905 H QM All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below Cutter Unit 1 pc Harness Ass y m 2 pin amp 9 pin 1 pc SO d Y M PI NN JG Y J Cord Bush 1 pc Print Head Cleaner 1 pc Installation Manual 1 copy X 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 2 ROTARY CUTTER B 8204 QM Remove the two black screws to detach the front plate Refer to section 4 1 2 Open top cover Refer to Section 3 1 3 Remove the side panel L from the printer Refer to section 3 2 4 Fix the cutter drive unit to the printer with the three SM 4x8 screws SM 4x8 Screw Cutter Drive Unit SM 4x8 Screw 5 Connect the 9 pin connector of the harness ass y to 2 pin connector to CN9 on the cutter driver unit respectively Harness Ass y 9 2 pins CN7 9 pins
148. cause the flash Display of error A command error has occurred in oes 18 message See Notes analyzing the command POWER FAILURE A power failure has occurred No No 20 INTIALIZING 24 128 flash memory card is being initialized 100BASE LAN is now being initialized 100BASE LAN 21 INITIALIZING Only when the optional B 9700 LAN QM is installed DHCP CLIENT DHCP pe is now being initialized INITIALIZING Only when the DHCP is effective 6 3 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 ON LINE MODE NOTES 1 error is found in the command received 16 bytes of the command error starting from the command code will be displayed However LF and NUL will not be displayed Example 1 ESC T20 G30 LF NUL Command error The following message appears T20630 B 5 4 V1 Example 2 ESC XR 0200 0300 0450 1200 1 LF NUL Command error The following message appears XR 0200 0300 045 B SX4T V1 0 Example 3 ESC 001 0A00 0300 2 2 A 00 B LF NUL Command error The following message appears PC001 0A00 0300 B SX4T V1 0 2 When error command is shown 3FH appears for codes other than codes 20H to AOH to DFH Threshold Setting for the Feed Gap Black Mark Sensor ON LINE B SX4T VX X Set a pre printed label PAUSE key PAUSE B SX4T VX x Press and hold the PAUSE key for
149. causing the ink resin to transfer onto the media Threshold setting A sensor setting operation to have the printer maintain a constant print position of pre printed media Transmissive sensor See Feed gap sensor USB Universal Serial Bus An interface that is used to connect peripherals such as a printer keyboard mouse The USB allows disconnection of a USB device without turning off the power INDEX INDEX A Auto ribbon saving 2 13 B Backing paper 1 3 code 1 1 Batch mode 2 9 Black mark 2 8 1 2 1 4 Black mark length A1 3 Black mark sensor 2 8 4 1 Built in rewinder 2 10 C Centronics 1 3 2 3 Cut mode 2 11 Cutter module 2 11 4 2 A1 2 D Dimensions 1 3 E Effective Print length A1 3 Effective print width A1 3 ERROR LED 1 4 3 1 Error message 5 1 Expansion I O interface 1 3 2 3 Expansion I O interface board A1 2 F Fan filter 2 2 Feed gap sensor 2 8 4 1 FEED key 1 4 3 1 Flash memory card 2 14 G Gap 2 8 Al 3 Gap length 1 3 Guaranteed print area 1 5 H Head lever 1 4 2 6 I Interface 2 3 Al 1 1 Issue mode 2 9 1 1 ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 INDEX J Jammed media 5 3 L Label 2 6 A1 2 A1 3 LCD message display 1 3 1 4 3 1 M Media 2 6 4 3 A1 2 Media length 1 3 Media pitch AT1 3 Media sensor 2 8 O ON LINE LED 1 4 3 1 Operation Panel 1 3 1 4 3 1 P Parallel interface 1 3 Parallel port 2 3 PAUSE key 1 4 3 1
150. ce Board 4 24 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 6 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM 7 Secure the USB interface board to the rear plate with the two SM 3x6 screws When connectina to the Main PC Board When connecting to the PCMCIA Interface Board USB Interface Board USB Interface Board SM 3x6 Screw SM 3x6 Screw 8 Tighten the two M 3x5 screws of the USB interface board that were loosened previously Refer to Caution 9 Secure the USB interface board to the PCB support plate when connecting to the Main PC board or PCB attachment plate when connecting to the PCMCIA interface board with the SM 3x6 screw When connecting to the Main PC Board PCB Support Plate PCB Attachment Plate M 3x5 Screw 4 25 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 6 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM 10 Attach the blind plate A to the rear plate If the PCMCIA interface board has been installed go to the next step Rear Bn SM 3x6 Screw Blind Plate A NOTE Incase that the PCMCIA interface board has been installed retain the blind plate A 11 Reassemble the side panel L to the printer in the reverse order of removal 4 26 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 7 LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM 4 7 LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM This optional interface board enables the printer to be used in
151. cel the network pass allocated to LPT 1 of the PC Failure to do this will disable you from firmware download 7 2 7 PROGRAM DOWN LOAD 1 NOTE Turn on the printer power by the following procedure Turn on the power while holding down the FEED key and PAUSE key and RESTART key Select the download mode or download mode 2 at the right by pressing the FEED key or PAUSE key Turn on the PC power and start up Windows 18 33012 7 3 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD DOWNLOAD MODE A download mode menu is displayed Click on the START button to access the program menu DOWNLOAD MODE DOWNLOAD MODE 2 Program downloading must be performed in the DOWNLOAD MODE It cannot be performed in On line mode or System mode Highlight TOSHIBA TEC B SX and Dwnld and click on B SX Downloader to start up the download program The main menu screen will appear as shown below Setting menu E B SX Downloader Setting Help B SX series Download Program Drives Drectries Files download file 2 c device g File Information Eaj Program Files SJ TOSHIBA TEC E B 5X o 4 BOOT V10 2800 2B ROM ed MAIN S O 2900 07 en CG ADU D ROM download files address size date RUIN 7 3 Drawing Model Marne Date Cancel EMD 7 PROGRAM DOWN LOAD EO18 33012A 7 3 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD b
152. ck mark or Square holes Round holes are not acceptable 76 2 mm Max 200 0 2 0 10 0 mm 10 0 1500 0 mm Print Side 30 0 112 0 mm 30 0 140 0 mm SX5T NOTE reflection rate of the black mark is 10 or less at wavelength of 950nm A square hole can substitute for the black mark When the square hole is used no printing is allowed on the black side 2 SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS EO10 33013A 2 1 MEDIA lt Non Print Area gt 2mm P d 1 0 mm Cut Position Printing Area Printing Area 1 0 mm 2 mm A 1 5 mm 1 5 mm Black Mark p 1 5 mm 1 5 mm 3 Relationship between the head effective print width and paper B SX4T Outside the print range m Head effective print width Outside the print range 1 4 0 n mm 104 0 mm x 0 2 mm mm 4 lt gt 112 0 Maximum paper width B SX5T Outside the print range Head effective print width Outside the print range 6 0 mm lt gt 128 0 mm 0 2 mm 5 140 0 mm Maximum paper width NOTE The specifications differ depending on the issue mode For details refer to the media specification table on page 2 1 2 3 2 SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS EO10 33013A 2 2 RIBBON 2 2 RIBBON 41 to 112 mm 41 to 134 mm EE Core Cardboard See the following figures Polyester film Opaque 300 5 mm long Polyester film Opaque 250 5 mm long 1 To ensure print quality and print head life use only TOSHI
153. clothing etc being drawn into the moving parts be sure to load the media once the printer has stopped moving completely The Print Head becomes hot immediately after printing Allow it to cool before loading the media avoid injury be careful not to trap your fingers while opening or closing the cover CAUTION Be careful not to touch the Print Head Element when raising the Print Head Block Failure to do this may cause missing dots by static electricity or other print quality problems NOTES 1 When the Head Lever is turned to Free position the Print Head is raised To allow printing the Head Lever must be set to Lock position This ensures that the Print Head is closed There are two head pressure levels in the Lock position Set the Head Lever depending on the media type Position 0 Labels Position Tags However proper position may differ depending on media For details refer to TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative Do not turn the Locking Ring counter clockwise too far or it may come off the Supply Holder The following procedure shows the steps to properly load the media into the printer so that it feeds straight and true through the printer The printer prints both labels and tags 1 Turn off the power and open the Top Cover 2 Turn the Head Lever to Free position then release the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 3 Open the Print Head Block Print Head
154. ction 5 1 for more detail Nothing is printed on The media 15 not loaded properly Load the media properly the media 2 The ribbon is not loaded properly 2 Load the ribbon properly The print head is not installed Install the print head properly Close properly the Print Head Block The ribbon and media are not Select an appropriate ribbon for the matched media type being used The printed image is The ribbon and media are not Select an appropriate ribbon for the blurred matched media type being used The Print Head is not clean Clean the print head using the Print Head Cleaner or a cotton swab slightly moistened with ethyl alcohol The cutter does not The Cutter Cover is not attached Attach the Cutter Cover properly cut properly The media is jammed in the Cutter Remove the jammed paper The cutter blade is dirty Clean the cutter blade E5 2 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 5 3 Removing Jammed Media 5 3 Removing Jammed Media CAUTION Do not use any tool that may damage the Print Head NOTE If you get frequent jams in the cutter contact a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative This section describes in detail how to remove jammed media from the printer 1 Turn off and unplug the printer 2 Open the Top Cover 3 Turn the Head Lever to Free position then open the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 4 Open the Print Head Block 5 Remove t
155. detected when the backing paper blocks the light from the LED Print Head Pinch Roller QO Take up Spool Platen Rewind Full Sensor Tr Backing Paper Rewind Full Sensor LED 2 2mm 44 4 mm 8 Cutter home position switch micro switch for Swing Cutter A cam positioned at the end of the cutter motor arm turns the micro switch on off in accordance with the cutter motion cycle one rotation The micro switch status indicates if the cutter is in the home position 2 SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS EO10 33013A 2 1 MEDIA 2 SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS Information regarding the supply specifications contained in Product Description is essential to service engineers Detail specifications and other information on the media and ribbon are described in Supply Manual by model It is issued by and sent from TOSHIBA TEC Sales Division upon release of new model or manual s revision When purchasing the supplies locally be sure to refer to the Supply Manual for details Use of non specified media may shorten the print head life and result in problems with bar code readability or print quality Be sure to read carefully and understand the Supply Manual since it also includes the details about notes precision of the print start position limitations on printing etc When selling the products to VARs instruct them to buy media and ribbons that the substances described in the following precautions are not included 2 1 ME
156. dress menu among Printer IP Address Socket Port Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP or DHCP Client ID RESTART CLIENT ID DHCP SOCKET PORT FEED SUBNET MASK GATEWAY IP ADRES 5 58 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 9 IP ADDRESS SETTING 1 Printer IP Address Gateway IP Address and Subnet Mask Settings After selecting the menu set the IP address using the following procedure 192 020 Set the first 3 digit value with the FEED or RESTART key Press the PAUSE key to move the cursor to the next 3 digit value oet the next values in the same way 192 168 010 020 1925109010020 132 02020 NOTES 1 Pressing the FEED key one time causes 1 change Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 1 change 2 If holding the FEED or RESTART key for 0 5 seconds or longer in the parameter setting the key is entered continuously After the last 3 digit value is set press the PAUSE key The display will show GATEWAY IP ADDRESS Set the values for the Gateway IP Address and Subnet Mask respectively 2 Socket Port Setting To set the socket port number follow the procedure below SOCKET PORI RESTART NUS _ PAUSE PORT ON 08000 select PORT ON or PORT OFF with the RESTART RA SEI or FEED key When PORT is selected a port PORT ON 08000 number is displayed Pressing the PAUSE key allows the port number setting
157. e Batch printing Label size 76mm Print tone fine adjustment value 0 5 50 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 7 SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 5 7 SENSOR ADJUSTMENT m Outline of the Sensor Adjustment In the Sensor Adjustment mode the status of the sensors and thermistors is displayed Also you can make a Threshold Setting for the Black Mark Feed Gap and Ribbon End Sensors The Sensor Adjustment menu contains the following lt 5 gt 5 5 ADJ PAUSE lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ Sensor Status Display 28 A 28 C Print Head Environmental Thermistor PAUSE lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ Sensor Status Display Heat Sink Thermistor PAUSE lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ REFLECT 3 5V Black Mark Sensor Status Display FEED and RESTART lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ PREFLECT T 4 809 Black Mark Sensor Adjustment with Tag Paper PAUSE lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ TRANS 2 4V Feed Gap Sensor Status Display FEED and RESTART lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ TRANS 4 1V Feed Gap Sensor Adjustment with Label PAUSE lt 5 gt 5 5 ADJ PE RO 1VT4 8V Black Mark Sensor Feed Gap Sensor Status Display No media FEED and RESTART lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ PEIRO 4 Black Mark Sensor Feed Gap Sensor Adjustment media PAUSE lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ RIBBON 0 3V Ribbon End Sensor Status Display FEED and RESTART lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ RIBBON 0 3V Ribbon End Sensor
158. e FEED and RESTART keys at the same time in the parameter setting the message returns to lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET 2 If holding the FEED or RESTART key for 0 5 seconds or longer in the parameter setting the key is entered continuously 3 changed parameter becomes enabled by pressing the PAUSE P 7 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING Example Character code table Printable characters depend on the fonts The fonts of the following characters are Times New Roman Helvetica Letter Gothic Prestige Elite Courier and Gothic 725 Black PC 850 o riz PC 8 201112 4 6 1 efe rere pale BER RT RU ERREUR lt e e e Fe eje e Of Of oF Fs EE u a ERES 852 857 Ka EX JERAR SE 86 5 ve E E EE Er E z a tal 27 E E B 851 B 855 045 4 8 5 JS EL EHI Dn e w x n x ea stk Clk e J EN E EN En NES E NS M ae 5 18 5
159. e B SX4T 3 2 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM option for the B SX4T This strip module consists of the take up block and the strip block Installing the strip module enables the printer to not only remove labels from the backing paper but wind the tag paper or label with backing paper onto the take up spool by using the rewinder guide plate The rewind full sensor is provided to detect the overflow if the wound tag paper or label exceeds the specified amount is provide 3 3 RIBBON SAVING MODULE B 9904 R QM option for the B SX4T By moving the print head up and down with a solenoid the ribbon saving module saves loss of the ribbon as far as possible It is small enough to be put into the print block 3 4 PCMCIA INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 PCM QM The PCMCIA Interface board allows use of the following ATA card LAN card or flash memory card when connected to the CPU PC board Number of slots Type II slot 2 slots San Disk A card conforming to the PC card ATA Card ATA standard Install into the slot 2 only LAN Card 3 COM 3CCE589ET Series This card installed into the slot 1 will not work EF 4M TB 4 Read Write Centennial Technologies INC FLO4M 15 11119 03 INTEL IMCOO4FLSA Flash Memory Simple TECNOLOGY STI FL 4A PC Card KING MAX FJN 004M6C Centennial Technoloaies Inc FLOAM 20 11138 67 Read See NOTE Flash Memory EF 1M TB Card 1 MB Mitsubishi Card 4 MB MF84M1 G7DATO1 NOTE Reading read on
160. e diode operating current is 16 mA Output circuit Printer External controller etc In the case of photo coupler OUTO Vcc r H There are seven output circuits and each output is open collector The voltage of Vcc is 24V max while the operating current is 150 mA For other details please refer to the Expansion I O specifications stored in the enclosed CD ROM or posted on the web site with the URL http barcode toshibatec co jp 1 EO10 33013A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS 4 USB Standard Conforming to Rev 1 1 2 Transfer type Control transfer Bulk transfer Transfer rate Full soeed 12M bps 5 Network interface LAN PCMCIA Constitution e PCMCIA board LAN card e 10 Base T or 100 Base T X LAN board Protocol TCP IP Network specifications server function e WEB printer function e Socket communication function FTP server function e E mail function 4 Sensor switch 1 Head up sensor Transmissive sensor This sensor located on the left front of the printer inside as viewed from the media outlet detects whether the print head is in position or not When the head lever is turned to the Free position the arm on the edge of the head lever shaft turns the sensor on 2 Head block position switch Transmissive sensor This sensor located on the left side of the print head block detects whether the print head block is in position
161. e font 4 types Price font 3 types 0 90 180 270 Serial interface RS 232C Parallel interface Centronics PCMCIA interface 9700 USB interface B 9700 USB QM LAN interface B 9700 LAN QM Expansion I O interface B 7704 IO QM NOTES Data trademark of International Data Matrix Inc U S 417 is a trademark of Symbol Technologies Inc US Code is a trademark of DENSO CORPORATION Maxi Code is a trademark of United Parcel Service of America Inc U S EA1 1 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33034 A1 2 Options A1 2 Options Option Name Swing cutter module B 4205 QM A stop and cut swing cutter Rotary cutter module B 8204 QM Strip module B 9904 H QM This allows use of on demand peel off operation or to take up labels and backing paper together when using the rewind guide plate To purchase the strip module please inquire at your local distributor saving B 9904 R This module moves print head up and down by using a to minimise ribbon usage as far as possible interface board external device with the exclusive interface PCMCIA interface B 9700 PCM QM This board enables the use of the following PCMCIA cards board LAN card 3 3 59 recommended ATA card Conforming to PC card ATA standard Flash memory card and 4MB cards See Section 2 9 interface board Install
162. e home position Rewinder overflow sensor Detects the amount of the rewound backing paper in strip printing mode If the amount overflows the capacity printing cannot be performed Ribbon take up motor sensor Controls ribbon motor rotation by detecting the slit on the Ribbon feed motor sensor ribbon take up motor and the ribbon feed motor Indicates the position of the slit sensor Strip sensor Detects whether or not the label is at the paper outlet in strip printing mode When the label is not detected the printer feeds the label at the print start position 8 Sensor 2 Check The status of the Print Head Thermistor Environmental Temperature Thermistor Heat Sink Thermistor Black Mark Sensor Feed Gap Sensor and Ribbon End Sensor are printed SENSOR2 H 20 C A 22 C S 25 C R 4 2V T 2 5V E 2 7V Ribbon end sensor status 0 0 5 0V Feed gap sensor status 0 0 5 0V Black mark sensor status 0 0 5 0V Heat sink thermistor status 25 C 80 C 90 C Environmental temperature thermistor status 0 86 C If it is undetectable C is printed Print head thermistor status 0 C 86 C RANK 7 Print Head B SX4T B SX5T Print head resistance rank Resistance Average Average 0 15 Resistance ohm Resistance ohm 2 05274 748 78 0400 0116 __6__ 819 831 1204 1222 __8_ 844 856 1241 1259 9 1 857 869 1260 1279 0 939
163. e plate with the four hooks 1 Pullthe ribbon motor sensor feed in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the two hooks on the connector side 2 Move the ribbon motor sensor feed in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the other hooks 3 Detach the ribbon motor sensor feed from the plate Ribbon Sensor Plate Feed Ribbon Motor Sensor Feed 10 15 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 6 RIBBON MOTOR SENSORS TAKE UP FEED 5 Replace the ribbon motor sensor feed with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e Attach the ribbon motor sensor feed to the ribbon sensor plate feed in the correct direction e Fit the positioning tabs of the ribbon sensor plate feed into the positioning holes of the ribbon motor block Ribbon Sensor Plate Feed Positioning Hole Positioning Tab Gear with Slits Ribbon Motor Block e Make sure that the gear with slits passes between the sensor portions Gear with Slits Sensor Portion NOTE This photo was taken from the gear side for being visible 10 16 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 7 PRINT HEAD 10 7 PRINT HEAD CAUTION 1 Never touch the element when handling the print head 2 Never touch the connector pins to avoid a breakdown of the print head by static electricity 3 Never remove the screws which secure the print head to the bracket Doing so may
164. e the covers and panels with a dry soft cloth or a cloth slightly moistened with mild detergent solution CAUTION DO NOT POUR WATER directly onto the printer DO NOT APPLY cleaner or detergent directly onto any cover or panel NEVER USE THINNEH OR OTHER VOLATILE SOLVENT on the plastic covers DO NOT clean the panel covers or the supply window with alcohol as it may cause them to discolour loose their shape or develop structural weakness 4 1 3 Optional Cutter Module The swing cutter and rotary cutter are available as an option They are both cleaned in the same way When removing the Cutter Cover of the rotary cutter unit remove the screws from the bottom of the cover 1 Be sure to turn the power off before cleaning the Cutter Module Loosen the two screws to remove the Cutter Cover Remove the Plastic Head Screw to detach the Media Guide Remove the jammed paper Clean the Cutter with a soft cloth slightly moistened with alcohol Reassemble the Cutter Module in the reverse order of removal 2 As the cutter blade is sharp care should be taken not to injure Screw yourself when cleaning amp GN Plastic Head Screw Cutter Unit Cutter Cover Media Guide i Fixed Cutter Swing Cutter E4 2 4 MAINTENANCE 4 2 Care Handling of the Media and Ribbon CAUTION Be sure to carefully review and understand the Supply Manual Use only media and ribbons that meet s
165. ed Feb 2003 PRINTED IN JAPAN TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION EO10 33013A TABLE OF CONTENTS Page OUTLINE 1 1 1 1 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF MODEL NUMBER 1 1 1 3 APPEARANCE AND DIMENTIONS APPROXIMATE 1 52 1 4 BASIC 5 1 3 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS 1 6 SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 4 2 3 CARE AND HANDLING OF THE MEDIA AND RIBBON 2 5 OPTIONAL KIT 3 1 3 1 CUTTER MODULE B 4205 QM Swing Cutter B 8204 QM Rotary Cutter 3 1 3 2 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM option for the 5 3 2 3 3 RIBBON SAV
166. electing the auto forward wait press the PAUSE key 23 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING NOTES 1 Ifthe printer is not used for a few days the top edge of the media may become curly resulting in a paper jam The Auto Forward Wait Function prevents this problem since the media feed amount is increased so that the media stops past the platen 2 When the Stop Position Fine Adjustment Value is set to direction the media will stop past the media outlet When the value is set to direction the media will stop inside the media outlet 3 This setting will be useful to fine adjust the cut position of labels 5 4 10 Head Up Cut Rewinder Selection With this parameter you can select the print head up in cut mode or the use of the Rewinder When 22 PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 9 times S2 PARAMETER SET HU CUT RWD OFF Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART HU CUT RWD OFF Head up is OFF or the Rewinder is not used FEED HU CUT RWD ON Head up is ON or the Rewinder is used After selecting the Head Up Cut Rewinder press the PAUSE key NOTES 1 In cut mode you can select ON OFF status of the head up In batch mode you can select the use of the built in Rewinder 2 cut mode be careful that the head up is unavailable depending on the rise of the solenoid s temperature 5 4 11 Ribbon
167. election SET RESTART DATA LENG 8bits lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED RESTART ACK BUSY TYPEI Centronics ACK BUSY timing selection FEED Stop bit selection RESTART lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET WEB PRINTER OFF lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Parity selection FEED RESTART PARITY EVEN lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET STOP BIT 1 1 FEED Web printer function selection RESTART lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Input prime selection RESTART INPUT PRIME FEED lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Transmision control code FEED RESTART XON READY AUTO selection lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET RESTART RBN NEAR END 70m lt 2 gt 5 IFEEBI RESTART LCD ENGLISH LCD message selection lt 2 gt SET RESTART 1 0 PE lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FORWARD WAIT OFF FEED Ribbon near end selection FEED Expansion I O selection Auto forward wait selection FEED RESTART lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED RESTART CENTRO MODE SPP Centronics mode selection lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Head up cut rewinder FEED HU CUT RWD OFF selection ESTAR lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET FEED RESTART PLUG amp PLAY OFF Plug amp Play selection lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET Ribbon save function FEED RIBBON SAVE selection RESTA ZZS PARAMETER SET FEED FEED RESTART LABE
168. election With this parameter you can select Type of the Centronics interface operating mode When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 22 times SOLD PARAMETER SET CENTRO MODE SPP Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART CENTRO MODE SPP SPP Compatible mode FEED CENTRO MODE ECP ECP ECP mode After selecting the Centronics Interface press the PAUSE key 5 4 24 Plug amp Play Selection With this parameter you can select whether or not the Plug amp Play function is activated When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 23 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET PLUG amp PLAY OFF Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART Unavailable ee qw After selecting the Plug amp Play press the PAUSE key 5 4 25 Label End Selection With this parameter you can select printing process when the label end is detected When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 24 times PARAMETER SIT LABEL END Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART LABEL END 1 TYPE1 Printing is paused while the label is issued FEED LABEL END TYPE2 Printing is paused after the label is issued After selecting the L
169. ements and when current is allowed to flow through each element it heats up causing a small dot to be burned onto thermal paper or a small dot of ink to be transferred from a thermal ribbon to ordinary paper Print speed The speed at which printing occurs This speed is expressed in units of ips inches per second Reflective sensor See Black mark sensor Resolution The degree of detail to which an image can be duplicated The minimum unit of divided image 15 called a pixel As the resolution becomes higher the number of pixels increased resulting in more detailed image Ribbon An inked film used to transfer an image onto the media In the thermal transfer printing it is heated by the thermal print head causing an image to be transferred onto the media Strip mode A device used to remove labels from the backing paper Supply Media and ribbon Tag A type of media with no adhesive Usually tags are made of cardboard or other durable material ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 GLOSSARIES Thermal direct printing A printing method using no ribbon but thermal media which reacts to heat The thermal print head heats the thermal media directly causing print image to be printed on the media Thermal print head A print head using thermal transfer or thermal direct printing method Thermal transfer printing A printing method that the thermal print head heats an ink or resin coating on the ribbon against the media
170. enoid driving time Counted during ribbon saving operation See NOTE 4 5 6 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTES 1 from 2 through 10 are initialized to 0 after RAM clear If the print distance is 8 2m or less B SX4T or 5 5m or less B SX5T it is rounded down and no data is added to the memory at power off 3 If the count is 31 or less it is rounded down and data is added to the memory at power off 4 If the driving time is 32 sec or less B SX4T or 27sec or less B SX5T it is rounded down and no data is added to the memory at power off 5 When a sent command results in an error the same number as the data capacity of the command is counted by byte 6 If the media distance covered is 50 0 cm or less it is rounded down and no data is added to the memory at power off Descriptions of the Parameters 11 12 13 PC KEY Back feed length fine adjustment K 9 9 mm to 9 9 mm PC 9 5 mm to 9 5 mm Key 2 NOTE Peow 14 Print tone fine adjustment Thermal transfer PC KEY 10 step to 10 step 15 Print tone fine adjustment Thermal direct PC KEY 10 step to 10 step 16 Ribbon take up motor driving voltage fine adjustment 15 step to 0 step PC KEY 17 Ribbon feed motor driving voltage fine adjustment PC 15 step to 0 step KEY X axis fine adjustment 99 5 mm to 99 5 mm Threshold manua
171. ensor Black Mark Sensor is for tag paper and the 8 Press the PAUSE key and the print mode setting display will Transmissive Sensor Feed appear Select the print mode with the FEED or RESTART Gap Sensor is for labels key Select the print mode which matches the media being used Basically the thermal transfer is with ribbon and the thermal direct is without ribbon lt 4 gt TEST PRINT SENSOR TRANS lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PRI TRANSAR 2 15 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 10 Test Print Cont NOTE When PAPER FEED is selected the printer feeds the media to the correct print start position If the print start position adjustment is unnecessary select PAPER NO FEED and save the media NOTE If the FEED key is pressed after the blank labels are printed the printer will enter the Factory Test mode To exit from the Factory Test mode press the PAUSE key 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 10 Test Print Press the PAUSE key and the issue mode setting display will appear Select the issue mode with the FEED or RESTART key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT E540 GUT Press the PAUSE key and the media size setting display will appear Select the media size with the FEED RESTART key lt 4 gt TEST PRINT LABEL LEN 76mm Press the PAUSE key and the paper feed setting display will appear Select whether or not a p
172. equired label length 2202 B SX4T 5 5 RS 232C 1MB 65536 lines 6 393216 lines 1MB 65536 lines 6 393216 lines 5 4 BSXOT 198 1MB 65536 lines 6 393216 lines IBASIC 1 256 lines 4KB 256 lines BASIC 2 256 lines 4KB 256 lines 1MB 65536 lines 6 393216 lines 1189 2m NOTE If an error occurs during dumping the printer will display an error message and stop printing The error can be cleared by pressing the PAUSE key and then the display will show lt 4 gt DUMP again After recovery from the error the printer will not start printing automatically 6 9 7 PROGRAM DOWN LOAD 18 33012 7 1 OUTLINE OF FEATURES 7 PROGRAM DOWN LOAD This section provides step by step instructions on how to setup and download the firmware to the B SX series thermal printer The firmware download will be made from a PC via the RS 232C interface and Centronics interface of the printer 7 1 OUTLINE OF FEATURES The software for performing the program download will allow the download of the Firmware Boot program Application program and Character generator from the provided FDK The software will be run on a standard PC and communication to the B SX series printer will be via the RS 232C interface and the Centronics interface Firmware Download The Boot program Application program and Character generator are installed into the B SX series printer s fl
173. er Expansion Interface Over Flow Sensor Ribbon Motor Ribbon Motor Take up B SX4 Option B SX4 Option Feed B SX5 Standard B SX5 Standard NOTE The cables are connected to the following connectors as standard without option B SX4T CN8 9 12 13 16 17 19 23 50 58 B SX5T 4 8 9 11 18 15 17 19 20 23 50 58 10 3 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 2 MAIN PC BOARD 4 Remove the four SMW 3x6 screws to detach the Main PC board from the printer 1 4 2 Te kH SMW 3x6 Screw lt Li E 5 Replace the Main PC board with new one then reassemble the reverse order of removal Main PC Board 10 4 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 3 PANEL BOARD AND LCD UNIT 10 3 PANEL PC BOARD AND LCD UNIT 10 3 1 LCD 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Remove the operation panel ass y Refer to Section 3 4 3 Remove the two LCD harnesses the four TT 2x6 screws and the two TT 3x8 screws from the LCD 2 6 Screw LCD LCD Harness Operation Panel Ass y TT 3x8 Screw TT 2x6 Screw Operation Panel Ass y 5 Replace the LCD with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal NOTE When reassembling lead the LCD harness through the space as the picture below shows Failure to do this may cause the cover to catch the ha
174. er life Use of tag paper when the thickness exceeds the specified value may affect the cutter life NOTE When using the Rotary Cutter be sure to install the Ribbon Saving Module 9904 Failure to do this may cause a paper jam or ribbon error ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 7 Loading the Media Build in rewinder mode The Rewinder Assembly of the Strip Module can be used in batch mode to take up the printed media as a Built in Rewinder 1 Remove the two Black Screws to detach the Front Plate 2 Attach the Rewinder Guide Plate enclosed with the optional Strip Module to the Strip Plate with the SMW 4x8 sems screws 3 Insert the media under the Rewinder Guide Plate 4 Wind the media onto the Take up Spool and fix it in position with the Take up Clip 5 Rotate the Take up Spool counterclockwise a few times to remove any slack in the media 6 Set the Selection Switch mounted on the Rewinder Assembly to REWINDER position Rewinder Guide Plate Adjustment Knob SM 4x8 Screw Cut mode When the optional Cutter Module 1s fitted the media is automatically cut A swing cutter and a rotary cutter are available as an option but they are used in the same way Insert the leading edge of the media into the Media Outlet of the Cutter Module ae Cutter Module Media Media Outlet mmm 4 13 If the loaded media is direct thermal media a chemically treated s
175. er the Strip Plate removed 3 Wind the backing paper onto the Take up Spool and fix it in position Fit the Take Up Clip so that with the Take up Clip Wind the paper counterclockwise around the longer side of the clip is the spool as this is the direction it rotates fitted into the shallow groove 4 Rotate the Take up Spool anti clockwise a few times to remove any in the Take Up Spool slack in the backing paper The backing paper can be 5 Set the Selection Switch mounted on the Rewinder Assembly to wound directly onto the Take STANDARD PEEL OFF position up Spool or a paper core When using the Take up Spool detach the Holder Stopper by removing the B 3x4 screw Otherwise it may be difficult to pull out the wound backing paper roll Take up Spool STANDARD PEEL OFF NM REWINDER Een SSS ey 422782 Front Plate Holder Stopper B 3x4 Screw Take up Spool Take up Clip Take up Clip When using a paper core put Black Screw Strip Plate Backing Paper the core on the Take up Spool with the Holder Stopper on it and attach the top edge of the backing paper to the core with adhesive tape The Take up Clip is not necessary This winding method is applicable to the Built in Rewinder mode 2 9 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 7 Loading the Media Cont NOTE Be sure to set the Selection Switch to REWINDER position ADJUSTMENT If the media skews when us
176. erated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and sed in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operations of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense for USA only Changes or modifications not expressly approved by manufacturer for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada TEC for CANADA only Copyright 2003 by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 570 Ohito Ohito cho Tagata gun Shizuoka ken JAPAN Safety Summary ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 Safety Summary Personal safety in handling or maintaining the equipment 15 extremely important Warnings and Cautions necessary for safe handling are included in this manual All warnings and cautions contained in this manual should be read and understood before handling or maintaining the equipment Do not attempt to effect repairs or modifications to this equipment If a fault occurs that cannot be rectified using the procedures described in thi
177. es between the printer and a PC In addition optional interfaces such as PCMCIA interface USB interface and LAN interface are available The expansion I O interface which is an option for the B SX4T series is provided on the B SX5T series as standard A 32 bit CPU and a Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA equipped with several peripheral LSIs realizes high system performance With the element positioned at the edge of the print head print quality is improved because the media passes straight through The B SX4T series accommodates a max format size of 104 0 mm wide by 1498 0 mm long and max printing speed of 10 sec The B SX5T series accommodates a max format size of 128 0 mm wide by 1498 0 mm long and max printing speed of 8 High throughput can be obtained with on the fly formatting Installation space is minimized because the media is loaded internally The metal cover and damper provide a heavy duty enclosure Various optional devices including the Strip module including the rewinder the ribbon saving module which economizes ribbon usage rotary cutter module and swing cutter module are available on the B SX4T series The strip module and the ribbon saving module are standard on the B SX5T series NOTE Every size is written in millimeter mm in this manual To obtain the size in inch divide by 25 4 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF MODEL NUMBER B SX4T GS10 QQ L Destination Code QQ North America Bloc
178. est contains the following sub menus lt 1 gt DIAG Vex PAUSE lt I gt DIAG Vx x Selection of the printing mode PRT TRANSFR PAUSE lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Selection of the dispensing mode SNO GUT PAUSE Prints out the Maintenance Counter Parameter GX MAINTENANCE CONT Settings FEED RESTART Y VXXX AUTO DIAGNOSTIC Performs a Self Diagnostic Test and prints out the result A FEED RESTART Vx Checks to see if there is any problem with the print head FEED RESTART NOTE Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x message appears in the display lt 1 gt DIAG VX X 5 3 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 5 3 1 Printing Mode Selection Press the PAUSE key The type of printing mode can be selected TRANSFR Thermal transfer or DIRECT Thermal direct After selecting the printing mode to be used press the PAUSE key RESTART rM Thermal transfer PRT TYPE TRANSFR ier ae o EE AA NOTE When using the ribbon be sure to select Thermal Transfer When using the thermal media be sure to select the Thermal Direct 5 3 2 Dispensing Mode Selection When TYPE S NO CUT is displayed press the PAUSE key The type of dis
179. ets the printer when paused or when an error occurs Used to set the threshold Refer to the Owner s Manual PAUSE key Pauses printing Message display shows PAUSE and a remaining count Used to set the threshold Refer to the Owner s Manual 291 mm W x 460 mm D x 308 mm 291 mm W x 521 mm D x 308 mm 1 EO10 33013A 1 4 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS 1 4 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS 1 Printing method Thermal direct printing or thermal transfer printing 2 Print head B SX4T 4 inches 1 Total number of dots 832 dots 2 Dot density 8 dots mm B SX5T 5 inches 1 Total number of dots 1536 dots 3 Effective print width 104 0 mm 4 Thermal pitch 0 125 mm 3 Effective print width 128 0 mm 2 Dot density 12 dots mm 4 Thermal pitch 0 083 mm 3 Print speed B OAA n 3 sec 6 sec 10 sec ue ossa UNDE ERE 3 sec 5 sec 8 sec NOTE These print speeds are available when printing ratio is less than 15 of the entire label or tag paper 4 Format size W x L 104 0 mm x 1498 0 mm Max 128 0 mm x 1498 0 mm 5 Issue mode Batch Auto cut Auto cut mode is available only when the optional cutter is attached Strip In case of the B SX4T the strip mode is available only when the op
180. etting for the Black Mark Sensor Reset Parameter Settings Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment Dump Mode B LED function LED Illuminates when Flashes when POWER printer is turned on ON LINE The printer is ready to print The printer is communicating with your computer ERROR Any error occurs with the printer The ribbon is nearly over See NOTE NOTE Flashes only when the Ribbon Near End Detection function is selected B Key function PAUSE Used to stop printing temporarily RESTART Used to restart printing FEED Used to feed the media NOTE Use the RESTART key to resume printing after a pause or after clearing an error B Error messages NOTES 1 lf an error is not cleared by pressing the RESTART key turn the printer off and then on 2 After the printer is turned off all print data in the printer is cleared 3 indicates the number of unprinted media Up to 9999 in pieces Error Messages Problems Causes Solutions Online mode with the Print Head Block open press the RESTART key COMMS ERROR A communication error has occurred Make sure the interface cable 15 correctly connected to the printer and the host and the host is turned on CUTTER ERROR The media is jammed in the cutter Remove the jammed media Then Only when the cutter press the RESTART key If this does module is installed on not solve the problem turn off the the printer printer a
181. f the FEED key When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 13 times SZAFARAME TER SEI hEBD REY FEED Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART Pon NOTE When FEED is selected the FEED key will feed one media when pressed When PRINT is selected the FEED key will print the data in the Image Buffer The last printed data After selecting the FEED key function press the PAUSE key 5 26 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 15 KANJI Code Selection With this parameter you can select KANJI code When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 14 times PARAMETER SET KANJI CODE Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART NA GODE PER Windows code FEED KANJI CODE TYPE2 Original code NOTE Kanji code selection is not supported by the QQ QP models as the Kanji ROMs are not installed After selecting the Kanji code press the PAUSE key 5 4 16 EURO Code Selection With this parameter you can select Euro Font code When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 15 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET EURO CODE BO Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option EURO CODE 20 EUR C
182. fly issue means that the printer can feed and print without stopping between labels There are restrictions in use of the media which is narrower than 50 mm For details refer to TOSHIBA TEC Head Quarters When perforating the media it should be done from the print side to the reverse side The reflectance of the black mark should be 1026 or less when the wavelength is 950nm The label length should be at least three times as long as the gap When taking up the printed media onto the take up spool in batch mode the outer roll diameter must not exceed 180mm When cutting the thermal label secure a gap of 6 mm or more and cut in the middle of the gap For the backing paper Glassine paper 7K white or equivalent should be used Also the light transmission rate of the backing paper should be 22 or above Ink used for pre printing the media should not contain hard substances such as carbonic calcium CaCO3 and Kaolin Al2Os 2510 2H50 Thermal paper used for the direct thermal printing must not have the specifications which exceed 800 ppm 250 ppm 500 ppm 14 Avoid using media containing SiOz or talc which wears the print head protection layer 1 Label Design gt f 2 0 20 0mm Max 76 2mm 955200 0 mm Backing 10 0 1500 0mm Reference Value Paper Label M 1 5 mm 1 5 mm 27 0 109 0 mm 27 0 137 0 mm 30 0 112 0 mm SX5T 2 Tag paper Bla
183. for the ribbon motor 9174 o Ragas rewinder unit In writable character or PC command Yes 14 Jo save mode SAVING THHES amp amp An error has occurred while writing to nspuswwereenm O O fias memory or ATA card erase error has occurred 16 FORMAT ERROR the flash memory ATA card Data cannot be stored because the flash 18 Display of error command error has occurred message See Notes analyzing the command 19 POWER FAILURE e A power failure has occurred No No P 5 FIOOBASE LAN 100 Base LAN Board is being INITIALIZING initialized EA2 1 12 RIBBON ERROR APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS NOTES e f a command error is found in the command received 16 bytes of the command error starting from the command code will be displayed However LF and NUL will not be displayed Example 1 ESC T20 G30 LF NUL Command error The following message appears T20G30 B SX4T V1 0A Example 2 ESC XR 0200 0300 0450 1200 1 LF NUL Command error The following message appears 0200 0300 045 B SX4T V1 0A Example 3 ESC PC001 0A00 0300 2 2 A 00 LF NUL Command error The following message appears PC001 0A00 0300 B SXA4T V1 0A e When the error command is shown 3FH appear
184. g and cleaning just after printing Doing so may cause you to be injured by the print head and the inner parts of the printer being hot 3 When cleaning the cutter be careful not to be injured by the cutter blade B 8204 QM 4205 VP Cutter Blade a lt Cutter Blade 4 careful not to pinch your fingers or hands with the covers CAUTION 1 Fix the harnesses and the cord bushes with the cable clamp Failure to do this may cause the covers to catch them Sensor Harness Cable Clamp stepping Motor Cable Cable Clamp Operation Panel Harness Cord Bush Cable Clamp Cord Bush Sensor Harness Cord Bush Print Head Harness 18 33012 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE 2 Do not remove the screws below Doing so will require the printer block position adjustment with the Jig i Lal Printer Block 3 Be careful not to damage the sensor window If so the sensor cannot detect the feed gap or the black mark correctly causing improper printing a Sensor Window 4 Be careful not to damage the print head element Doing so will cause improper printing Print Head T 4 a Ld 3 NOTE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 MAINTENANC
185. g to the Main PC Board SM 3x6 Screw PCB Support Plate M 3x5 Screw When connecting to the PCMCIA Interface Board M 3x5 Screw 9 Reassemble the side panel L in the reverse order of removal NOTE Precaution for the LAN cable connection When connecting a LAN cable with the hooded connectors to the LAN interface board it may not be connected depending on the shape of the hood In this case move aside the hood connect the cable and return the hood to the former position 4 30 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 8 EXPANSION I O INTERFACE BOARD B 7704 1O QM 4 8 EXPANSION I O INTERFACE BOARD B 7704 IO QM This optional interface board is provided with an expansion interface NOTE The expansion I O interface board is standard on the B SX5T series All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below Expansion Board 1 pc Expansion Cable 1 pc Installation Manual 1 copy Locking Support WLS 16 0 1 pc NOTE The locking support is not used on this printer 1 Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the side panel from the printer Refer to section 3 2 3 Remove the two M 3x6 screws and detach the blind plate B from the back Blind Plate B 4 Remove the two B 3x6 screws from the expansion I O board B 3x6 Screw 6 4 31 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTION
186. guaranteed A1 4 Ribbon Please make sure that the ribbon being used 15 approved by TOSHIBA TEC The warranty does not apply to any problem caused by using non approved ribbons For information regarding TOSHIBA TEC approved ribbon please contact a TOSHIBA TEC service representative Spool type Width 68 134 mm Recommended width 1s 41 50 68 102 and 134 mm Length 090 mm The table below shows the correlation between ribbon width and media width backing paper is not included 68mm Jj45 68mm NOTES To ensure print quality and print head life use only TOSHIBA TEC specified ribbons To avoid ribbon wrinkles use a ribbon that is wider than the media by 5 mm or more However too much difference in width between the two may cause wrinkles When using a 134 mm wide media be sure to use a 130 mm wide ribbon Use of other ribbons may cause ribbon wrinkles EA1 5 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS Appendix 2 describes the LCD messages displayed on the operation panel Symbols in the message 1 The LED is illuminated The LED is flashing The LED is unlit 2 the number of unprinted media Up to 9999 in pieces 3 92 5 ATA Card s remaining memory to 9999999 in bytes 4 Flash memory card remaining memory for PC save area 0 to 895 in bytes 5 amp amp am
187. he FEED or RESTART key RESTART ON DEMAND The printer prints 166 lines approx 50cm and then pauses printing FEED The printer prints all buffer data and then stops printing Press the PAUSE key to start printing The printer prints the data in the selected receive buffer NOW PRI NTI NG 11 10 After completing the printing the display returns to lt 4 gt DUMP MODE lt 4 gt DUMP MODE 6 8 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 3 DUMP MODE 11 Reset the printer by turning the power off and on The display shows ON LINE ON LINE NOTE When the PAUSE key is pressed during printing the number of unprinted media is displayed The data in the receive buffer is printed as follows AX 000 000 0 0 00760 1100 0 740 C LC 003 0 0020 0030 0660 0 2 3 LC 0070 0 020 0070 0660 0 9 1 0050 0020 DEFGHI J PC10 0 350 0400 1 1 0 0 B ABCDef ghi j kl mnop PV02 0330 0660 0270 0250 00 B B PV03 0900 0180 T 0 5 A 0 1234567890 ABCDE Feed direction Print Conditions e Printing width 4 2 inches e Sensor selection None e Print speed 6 B SX4T 5 sec B SX5T e Printing mode Depends on the selection in use e 16 bytes line e Data is printed in the order from the new one to the old one e Data specified by the receive buffer write pointer will be printed in boldface Receive buffer size R
188. he guaranteed print area The centre of media is positioned at the centre of the Print Head Print quality in the 3 mm area from the print head stop position including 1 non printable area for print speed slow down is not guaranteed A1 4 Ribbon Please make sure that the ribbon being used 15 approved by TOSHIBA TEC The warranty does not apply to any problem caused by using non approved ribbons For information regarding TOSHIBA TEC approved ribbon please contact a TOSHIBA TEC service representative Spool type Width 41 112 mm Recommended width 1s 41 50 68 84 and 112 mm Length 090 mm The table below shows the correlation between ribbon width and media width backing paper is not included 68mm 45 63mm NOTES To ensure print quality and print head life use only TOSHIBA TEC specified ribbons To avoid ribbon wrinkles use a ribbon that is wider than the media by 5 mm or more However too much difference in width between the two may cause wrinkles You can use a ribbon that is narrower than the media by 5 mm or more however this makes the print area narrower EA1 5 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS APPENDIX 2 MESSAGES AND LEDS Appendix 2 describes the LCD messages displayed on the operation panel Symbols in the message 1 O The LED is illuminated The LED is flashing The LED is unlit 2 the num
189. he printer returns to an idle condition ON LINE B SX4T 1 2 3 3 4 Dump Mode ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 3 4 Dump Mode In Dump mode any characters sent from the host computer will be printed Received characters are expressed in hexadecimal values This allows the user to verify programming commands and debug program For details please refer to your nearest TOSHIBA TEC service representative 4 MAINTENANCE ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 4 1 Cleaning 4 MAINTENANCE WARNING This chapter describes how to perform routine maintenance Be sure to disconnect the To ensure the continuous high quality operation of the printer you should power cord before perform a regular maintenance routine For high throughput it should be performing maintenance done on a daily basis For low throughput it should be done on a weekly Failure to do this may basis cause an electric shock To avoid injury be careful not to pinch your fingers while opening or closing the cover and print head block The print head becomes hot immediately after printing Allow it to cool before performing any maintenance Do not pour water directly onto the printer 4 1 Cleaning To maintain the printer performance and print quality please clean the printer regularly or whenever the media or ribbon is replaced 4 1 1 Print Head Platen Turn off the power and unplug the printer Sensors Open the
190. he ribbon and media Print Head Block Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 6 Remove the jammed media from the printer DO NOT USE any sharp implements or tools as these could damage the printer 7 Clean the Print Head and Platen then remove any further dust or foreign substances 8 Paper jams in the Cutter Unit can be caused by wear or residual glue from label stock on the cutter Do not use non specified media in the cutter E5 3 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 5 4 Threshold Setting To maintain a constant print position the printer uses the Transmissive Sensor to detect the gap between labels by measuring the amount of light passing through the media When the media is pre printed the 5 4 Threshold Setting NOTES If the PAUSE key is released within 3 seconds while in the pause state the paper will not feed Failure to feed more than darker or more dense inks can interfere with this process causing paper jam errors To get around this problem a minimum threshold can be set for the sensor in the following way B Threshold setting procedure 1 5 labels may result in Ld 1 Turnthe power ON The printer is in stand by mode incorrect threshold setting While the Print Head Block ON LINE is raised the PAUSE key BESA V1 0A does not work paper end error cannot be 2 Load a pre printed media roll detected during paper feed 3 Press the PAUSE key mat the 22 PAUSE ensor fo
191. he ribbon saving function by the parameter setting Regarding the B SX5T series you only need to enable the ribbon saving function by the parameter setting When enabling the ribbon saving function it must be set depending on the head lever position For details please contact the nearest TOSHIBA TEC service representative or sales agent Printer model and option Head lever position Parameter setting Ribbon saving function B SX5T TS12 QQ Position Label RBN SAVE OFF B SX5T TS12 QP or Default B SX4T TS10 QQ Position Tag B SX4T TS10 QP B SX5T TS12 QQ Position Label RBN SAVE ON Label Enabled for label B SX5T TS12 QP B SX4T T910 QQ B 9904 R QM position 2 Tag RBN SAVE ON TAG Enabled for tag paper B SX4T TS10 QP B 9904 R QM NOTES 1 Be sure to match the parameter setting to the head lever position according to the media type Mismatching may cause a failure of the ribbon saving module 2 The amount of the saved ribbon differs depending on the print pattern and print speed 3 When the head lever position is set to Position 29 Tag and RBN SAVE ON TAG is selected the amount of the saved ribbon is a little less than that of RBN SAVE ON Label with the head lever position Label due to a control of the mechanism TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATIONI 1 33036 TEC Thermal Printer B SXAT SX5T SERIES Product Description Document No EO10 33013A Original Jan 2003 Revis
192. hen the Maintenance Counter Parameter Settings is printed the message returns to lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Press the PAUSE key twice The Self Diagnostic Test is ready Press the PAUSE key to start lt 1 gt DIAG AUTO DIAGNOSTIC The printer starts printing out the Self Diagnostic Test and prints out the result During printing the message below appears on the display lt 1 gt DIAG CHECKING 8 PRINT After printing is completed the display returns to lt 1 gt DIAG NOTE an error occurs an error message appears and the printer stops printing After clearing the error press the PAUSE key to return the display to lt 1 gt DIAG The printer does not restart printing automatically e Print Sample B SX4T 7FM00226000 MAIN 01DEC2002 V1 0A 1A00 BOOT 16DEC2002 V1 0 8500 5600 NONE 0000 NONE 0000 OK 8MB SLOT1 ATA SLOT2 LAN 00000000 00000000 H 20 C A 22 C S 25 C R 4 2V T 2 5V E 2 7V NOTES 1 Print conditions Preset count 1 Print speed 6 sec B SX4T 5 sec B SX5T Sensor No sensor Printing method Thermal transfer Supply length 87 mm Issue mode Batch printing 2 Software version No Part No of ROM and checksum vary according to the software version of PROGRAM ROM The last two digits of the checksum are usually 00 When Kanji ROM is not installed the checksum becomes 0000 The symbol of C may not be prin
193. hold etc which are set by the PC command This is useful when using several types of media by turns or when the print start position or cut strip position is required to be fine adjusted The Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment menu contains the following lt 3 gt ADJUST SET PAUSE lt 3 gt ADJUST SET FEED ADJ 10 O0mm Feed Length Fine Adjustment ee RESTART lt 3 gt ADJUST SET CUT ADJ 10 0mm Cut Strip Position Fine Adjustment eel RESTART lt 3 gt ADJUST SET BACK ADJ 5 0mm Back Feed Length Fine Adjustment FEED RESTART lt 3 gt ADJUST SET X ADJUST 50 0mm FEED X Axis Fine Adjustment RESTART SS2ADJUST SET TONE ADJ lt T gt 3 Print Tone Fine Adjustment Thermal Transfer RESTART lt 3 gt ADJUST SET TONE ADJ D 2 Print Tone Fine Adjustment Thermal Direct RESTART lt 3 gt ADJUST SET RBN ADJ FW 10 FEED Ribbon Motor Drive Voltage Fine Adjustment Take up Motor RESTART lt 3 gt ADJUST SET RBN ADJ lt BK gt 5 FEED Ribbon Motor Drive Voltage Fine Adjustment Feed Motor RESTART lt 3 gt ADJUST SET THRESHOLD lt R gt 1 OV FEED Threshold Fine Adjustment Black Mark Sensor RESTART lt S gt ADJUST SET Threshold Fine Adjustment Feed Gap Sensor THRESHOLD lt T gt 1 4V RESTART 9 33 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE A
194. hoto coupler is positioned at the center of the round hole of the cover Be careful not to damage the sensor Photo Coupler Make sure that the sensor harness doesn t appear out of the printer block If so the sensor harness may touch the ribbon and the media causing a print failure Ribbon End Sensor Ass y Printer Block b Sensor Harness 10 37 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 15 FAN MOTOR 10 15 FAN MOTOR 1 Remove the side panel 1 Refer to Section 3 2 2 Remove the two B 4x35 screws from the side panel L Side Panel L B 4x35 Screw 3 Remove the fan motor fan spacer fan base fan cover from the side panel L Fan Spacer Side Panel L 2 Fan Motor Fan Motor Harness Fan Base Fan Cover 4 Replace the fan motor with a new one and then reassemble in the reverse order of removal NOTES 1 Tighten the B 4x35 screws with 94 1 188 2 Necm torque 2 Attach the fan motor so that it takes the air into the printer Refer to the arrows embossed on the fan motor Ventilating direction Fan motor s rotating direction 3 Attach the fan motor fan base fan cover in the correct orientation Refer to the picture of Step 3 10 38 PRINTED IN JAPAN TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION EO18 33012A PRINTED IN JAPAN TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATIONI EO0 33013A
195. ht RUN and click on RUN 3 When the RUN display appears type in A SETUP and click on OK 4 Install the Download Program by following the messages on the display 7 3 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD If it ever becomes necessary to upgrade the firmware in the B SX series printer you will be supplied with a floppy disk containing the latest firmware revision similar to that shown below Firmware FDK Main Firmware FDK Boot CG B SX4T Series B SX4T Series FIRMWARE MAIN V1 0 FIRMWARE BOOT CG V1 0 WR FD SX FIRM WR FD SX FIRM MAIN SX4 MAIN V10 Z903 F9 EXE BOOT SX4 BOOT V10 Z900 71 ROM SX4 MAIN V 10 Z903 F9 ROM 7FM00226000 7100 7FM00226000 F900 C G SX CG AD00 ROM 1st November 2002 7FM00227000 AD00 V001 000 1st November 2002 Copyright 2002 V001 000 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION Copyright 2002 All Rights Reserved TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved The following paragraphs give the download procedure that the firmware Boot program Application program and Character generator is copied onto the PC hard disk before being transferred to the printer Before starting the download procedure e Copy the firmware program contained in the FDKs to your specified directory of the hard disk If the file format of the file installed into the FDK is click it twice to decompress into file e Connect the printer to your PC with the Centronics I F cable or the RS 232C I F cable For the Centronics communication can
196. ia and ribbon manufacturers 4 3 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 5 1 Error Messages 5 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter lists the error messages possible problems and their solutions If a problem cannot be solved by taking the actions described in this chapter do not attempt to repair the printer Turn off and unplug the printer then contact an authorised TOSHIBA TEC service representative for assistance 5 1 Error Messages NOTES e Ifan error is not cleared by pressing the RESTART key turn the printer off and then on After the printer is turned off all print data in the printer is cleared indicates the number of unprinted media Up to 9999 in pieces Problems Causes Online mode with the Print Head Block open the RESTART key COMMS ERROR A communication error has occurred Make sure the interface cable is correctly connected to the printer and the host and the host 15 turned on PAPER JAM 1 The media is jammed in the media Remove the jammed media and clean path The media is not fed smoothly the Platen Then reload the media correctly Finally press the RESTART key A wrong Media Sensor is selected for 2 Turn the printer off and then on Then the media being used select the Media Sensor for the media being used Finally resend the print job The Black Mark Sensor is not Adjust the sensor position Then press correctly aligned with the
197. iation and reception of electrical noise the interface cables must meet the following requirements Fully shielded and fitted with metal or metallised connector housings Keep as short as possible Should not be bundled tightly with power cords Should not be tied to power line conduits B RS 232C Cable description The serial data cable used to connect the printer to the host compute should be one of the following two types DB 9S DB 25P Connector to PC Connector to Printer 1 N C MEM 1 F G 2 RXD be 3 TXD 3 TXD 5 GND 5 RTS 6 DSR_ lt gt 6 DTR 7 RTS 7 SG 8 DSR 9 l i DB 25S DB 25P Connector to PC Connector to Printer 1 Shield 1 F G 3 RXD 3 TXD 5 CTS 5 RTS NOTE Use an RS 232C cable with the connector including inch type securing screws for the QQ model or metric type securing screws for the QP model EA3 1 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES B Font lt A gt Times Roman medium lt B gt Times Roman medium lt C gt Times Roman bold D Times Roman bold lt E Times Roman bold F Times Roman italic G Helvetica medium lt H gt Helvetica medium I Helvetica medium lt J gt Helvetica bold lt K gt Helvetica bold L Helvetica italic lt M gt PRESENTATION BOLD lt N gt Letter Gothic medium O Prestige Elite medium lt P gt Prestige Elite
198. in this manual and set up the printer at a proper location Fit the Fan Filter to the printer Refer to Section 2 3 The host computer must have a serial Centronics parallel USB or LAN port Refer to Section 2 4 Be sure to insert the power cord plug into an AC outlet Refer to Section 2 5 Load the media Refer to Section 2 7 Adjust the position of the Feed Gap Sensor or Black Mark Sensor depending on the media being used Refer to Section 2 7 Load the ribbon Refer to Section 2 8 Turn the power ON Refer to Section 2 6 Perform a test print Refer to Section 2 10 Install the Printer Drivers Refer to the Printer Driver Manual When installing the printer it is important to ensure that the Fan Filter is attached before using the printer The Fan Filter consists of 2 parts 1 Filter Pad 2 Filter Retainer To fit the Fan Filter put the Filter Pad inside the Filter Retainer and simply press into place as shown in the diagram below ensuring connecting pins are aligned with the connecting holes Filter Pad E2 2 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 4 Connecting the Cables to Your Printer NOTES 1 The picture on the right shows the layout of the interface connectors when the options are fully installed It may be different depending on your system configuration The USB interface and LAN interface cannot be used at the same time ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 4 Connecting the Cable
199. ine adjustment value equals to the sum of the fine adjustment values set by the PC command and this parameter The maximum cut position fine adjustment value is 50 0 When the value reached the maximum the value remains unchanged even if the subsequent fine adjustment is performed e Strip Position Fine Adjustment Example Label Print Head 0 0 mm Platen Backing Paper Strip Shaft MEL LUC NEN L Print Head 3 0 mm Platen Backing Paper Strip Shaft Somm ja Print Head 3 0 mm Platen Backing Paper Strip Shaft NOTE The print stop position when printing the label in strip mode varies according to label length as the strio mode printing stops so that the edge of the strip shaft is 4 mm from the middle of the gap This is because the gap length is programmed as 2 mm When the gap length is 5 mm or more the effective print length should be set to the value obtained by subtracting 2mm from the label pitch that is set the gap length to 2 mm If the print format hangs over strip Shaft Backing Paper the gap as a result correct the print start position 5 36 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT 5 5 3 Back Feed Length Fine Adjustment With this parameter you can fine adjust the Back Feed Length When 32ADJUST SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key twice lt SPADIUST SER BACK ADJ 0 0mm Press the PAUSE key to start Use the
200. ing the Built in Rewinder turn the Adjustment Knob of the Rewinder Guide Plate to correct the media feed Clockwise turn moves the Rewinder Guide Plate forward and counter clockwise moves it backward When the media skews to the Loosen the SM 4x screw turn the Adjustment Knob clockwise and then tighten the SM 4x6 amp screw when the Rewinder Guide Plate is positioned correctly When the media skews to the left Loosen the SM 4x6 screw turn the Adjustment Knob counter clockwise and tighten the SM 4x8 screw when the Rewinder Guide Plate is positioned correctly ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 7 Loading the Media Build in rewinder mode When the Rewinder Guide Plate is attached the Take up Spool can be used as a Built in Rewinder to take up the printed media 1 Remove the two Black Screws to detach the Front Plate Front Plate Black Screw 2 Attach the Rewinder Guide Plate to the Strip Plate with the SMW 4x8 sems screws Rewinder Guide Plate SMW 4x8 Screw 3 Insert the media under the Rewinder Guide Plate 4 Wind the media onto the Take up Spool and fix it in position with the Take up Clip 5 Rotate the Take up Spool counterclockwise a few times to remove any slack in the media 6 Set the Selection Switch mounted on the Rewinder Assembly to REWINDER position Adjustment Knob SM 4x8 Screw Rewinder Guide Plate E2 10 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 7 Loading the Media C
201. ing Cutter E4 2 4 MAINTENANCE 4 2 Care Handling of the Media and Ribbon CAUTION Be sure to carefully review and understand the Supply Manual Use only media and ribbons that meet specified requirements Use of non specified media and ribbons may shorten the head life and result in problems with bar code readability or print quality All media and ribbons should be handled with care to avoid any damage to the media ribbons or printer Read the guidelines in this section carefully ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 4 2 Care Handling of the Media and Ribbon Do not store the media or ribbon for longer than the manufacturer s recommended shelf life Store media rolls on the flat end Do not store them on the curved sides as this might flatten that side causing erratic media advance and poor print quality Store the media in plastic bags and always reseal after opening Unprotected media can get dirty and the extra abrasion from the dust and dirt particles will shorten the print head life Store the media and ribbon in a cool dry place Avoid areas where they would be exposed to direct sunlight high temperature high humidity dust or gas The thermal paper used for direct thermal printing must not have specifications which exceed 800 ppm 250 ppm and 500 ppm Some ink used on pre printed media may contain ingredients which shorten the print head s product life Do not use labels pre printed with
202. ing the Media Sensor Upper 1 Remove the sensor cover upper from the sensor holder upper while unhooking the two hooks Sensor Cover Upper Media Sensor Upper Sensor Holder Upper Hook 2 Detach the media sensor upper from the sensor holder upper Media Sensor Upper Sensor Holder Upper 3 Replace the media sensor upper with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points When reassembling the media sensor upper fit the positioning pins of the sensor holder upper into the positioning holes e When reassembling the sensor cover upper fit the cut portion onto the portion A of the sensor holder upper Sensor Cover Upper Media Sensor Upper Positioning Hole Positioning Pin Sensor Holder Upper Positioning Pin 10 28 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER 10 11 3 Replacing the Media Sensor Lower 1 Remove the sensor cover lower from the sensor holder lower while unhooking the two hooks Sensor Cover Lower Media Sensor Lower sensor Holder Lower Hook L 2 Detach the media sensor lower from the sensor holder lower Media Sensor Lower Sensor Holder Lower 3 Replace the media sensor lower with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e When reassembling
203. ing this board enables a connection to a PC which has a USB interface NOTE To purchase the optional kits please contact the nearest authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative or TOSHIBA TEC Head Quarters A1 3 Media Please make sure that the media being used is approved by TOSHIBA TEC The warranty does not apply when a problem is caused by using media that is not approved by TOSHIBA TEC For information regarding TOSHIBA TEC approved media please contact a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative A1 3 1 Media Type Two types of media can be loaded for this thermal transfer and direct thermal printer label or tag The table below shows size and shape of the media available for this printer Black Mark Black Mark Label na 2 Refer to Taa paper on reverse side Stop position Stop position i Cut position V N w l Es mam e 7 Cut position EA1 2 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 A1 3 Media A1 3 1 Media Type Cont Unit mm Label dispensing mode Media pitch Tag 10 0 1500 0 3 sec 6 sec 30 0 1500 0 254 1500 0 20 100 Hm socueo OVsee 28014980 23014980 BrPxusespWowdema 7 Thickness 0 15 0 29 NOTES 1 To ensure print quality and print head life use only TOSHIBA TEC specified media 2 The media length specifications for use of the cutter are I When issuing a label using the swing
204. inter 7 Clean the Print Head and Platen then remove any further dust or foreign substances 8 Paper jams in the Cutter Unit can be caused by wear or residual glue from label stock on the cutter Do not use non specified media in the cutter E5 3 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 5 4 Threshold Setting To maintain a constant print position the printer uses the Transmissive Sensor to detect the gap between labels by measuring the amount of light passing through the media When the media is pre printed the 5 4 Threshold Setting NOTES If the PAUSE key is released within 3 seconds while in the pause state the paper will not feed Failure to feed more than darker or more dense inks can interfere with this process causing paper jam errors To get around this problem a minimum threshold can be set for the sensor in the following way B Threshold setting procedure 1 5 labels may result in an 1 Turn power ON The printer is in stand by mode incorrect threshold setting While the Print Head Block ON LINE is raised the PAUSE key B SX41 V1 0A does not work paper end error cannot be 2 Load a pre printed media roll detected during paper feed 3 Press the PAUSE key Selecting the Transmissive PAUSE Sensor for pre printed B SYAT V1 0A labels within software commands allows the 4 The printer enters the pause mode printer to detect the proper 5 Press and hold the P
205. ion Power Switch AC Power Inlet O OFF ON 1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 1 5 Appearance 1 5 4 Operation Panel POWER LED Green ON LINE LED Green ERROR LED Red FEED key PAUSE key RESTART key Please see Section 3 1 for further information about the Operation Panel Locking Ring 1 5 5 Interior Ribbon Stopper Supply Holder Print Head Block Print Head Platen Head Lever Supply Shaft Ribbon Shaft E1 4 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 1 Precautions 2 PRINTER SETUP This section outlines the procedures to setup your printer prior to its operation The section includes precautions connecting cables assembling accessories loading media and ribbon inserting the optional memory card and performing a test print 2 1 Precautions To insure the best operating environment and to assure the safety of the operator and the equipment please observe the following precautions Operate the printer on a stable level operating surface in a location free from excessive humidity high temperature dust vibration or direct sunlight Keep your work environment static free Static discharge can cause damage to delicate internal components Make sure that the printer is connected to a clean source of AC Power and that no other high voltage devices that may cause line noise interference are connected to the same mains Assure that the printe
206. ised service representative E2 11 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 9 Inserting the Optional PCMCIA Cards 2 9 Inserting the Optional When the optional PCMCIA Interface Board is installed into the printer PCMCIA Cards CAUTION To protect PC cards discharge static electricity from your body by touching the metal cabinet of the printer before touching the card Before inserting or removing a PCMCIA card make sure that the printer s power is turned off Be sure to protect PCMCIA Cards when not in use by putting them into their protective covers Do not subject the card to any shocks or excessive force nor expose the card to extremes in temperature or humidity The card may be inserted into the slot halfway even in the wrong orientation However the slot is safety designed so that the card will not seat against the connector pins NOTE Reading a read only type flash memory is possible if it has been used on the TOSHIBA TEC printer such as B 472 and B 572 there will be two PCMCIA slots available as shown in the figure below This allows the use of Flash Memory type Cards or I O Cards such as LAN Cards The following paragraphs outline how to insert PCMCIA cards 1 Make sure that the printer s Power Switch is in the OFF position 2 Hold the PCMCIA Card so that the side with the model name faces left Insert the card into the proper slot until the Eject B
207. issue counts of the characters of various sizes lt 4 gt TEST PRINT CHARACTERS un un S m m 2 lt o 5 U gt c o and the printer will print the specified issue counts of the bar codes lt 4 gt TEST PRINT BARCODE Press the FEED key and PAUSE key and the printer will print the specified issue counts of blank labels lt 4 gt TEST PRINT NON PRINTING Press the PAUSE key and the LCD Message Display will return to showing the test print start message E2 14 2 PRINTERSETUP eee ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33034 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 10 Test Print 2 10 Test Print Cont Sample of the bar code test print label f iiim Sample of factory test label ABCDEFG1234R ed poc ue reri eee eaan 4 See eee po oa pu ED 0 a 6 4 px S M roseis ecd I Ll RR _ pr IR WEN era 2 mom pu aes 4 pM pj e e a mM p a IZ gue DRE PETI n m SEMEL Nen mea E2 16 3 ON LINE MODE ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 3 1 Operation Panel 3 ON LINE MODE 3 1 Operation Panel NOTE Flashes only when the Ribbon Near End Detection function is
208. ivalent TD DSR DTR Signal level Input voltage H 3V 15V Output voltage 6 13V L 8V 15V L 6V 13 2 Centronics interface Data input method 8 bit parallel DATA 1 8 Control signals Compatibility mode nStrobe nAck Busy PError Select nAutoFd nlnit nFault nSelectlIn ECP mode HostClk PeriphCIk PeriphAck nAckReverse XFlag HostAck nReverseRequest nPeriphRequest IEEE1284Active Data input code ASCII JIS 8 bit code for European characters 8 bit code for graphic Receiving buffer 1MB Input Output circuit configuration and Input Output conditions Signal Name 5 741514 or equivalent Input Output Data 1 nStrobe HostClk Logical level input nInit nReverseRequest 1 2 5V Input nAutoFd HostAck 0 0 0 4V nSelectIn IEEE1284Active Busy PeriphAck Logical level input nFault nPeriphRequest 4 2 4 5V Output nAck PeriphCIk 0 0 0 4V Select XFlag PError nAckReverse 1 EO10 33013A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS 3 Expansion I O interface B SX4T Option Interface circuit input circuit Printer External controller etc Vcc R Photo coupler TLP521 TOSHIBA There are six input circuits and each input is a current loop using a photo coupler The anode of the photo coupler is connected to common pin COM1 in each of the six circuits Each cathode is independent The voltage of Vcc is 24 V max while th
209. k Feed Speed setting STD 3 second LOW 2 second 47 49 units of 64 KB units of 64 KB OFF Unavailable Port No 0 to 65535 OFF Unavailable 56 BASIC interpreter trace setting ON Available OFF Unavailable 53 0 KB to 896 KB DHCP function setting ON Available OFF Unavailable al e aS DHCP ID setting Max 16 characters 59 ESS ID ESS ID for wireless LAN Max 32 characters 60 CONNECTION INFRASTRUCTURE Wireless LAN connecting method Infrastructure mode Adhoc mode 51 External character registration area size KB to 896 d 61 CHANNEL Channel No setting to connect wireless LAN Channel No 00 to 14 62 AUTH OPEN SYSTEM Wireless LAN authorization method Open system method SHARED KEY Shared key method 63 WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy ON Available Wireless LAN coding setting OFF Unavailable Wireless LAN coding key setting 128 bits 128 bit coding key Wireless LAN coding key No at the data sending are valid for 40 bit coding key are valid for 40 bit coding key 3 68 WEP KEY 3 Wireless LAN coding key No 3 13 bytes fixed Only the top 5 bytes are valid for 40 bit coding key 13 bytes fixed Only the top 5 bytes are valid for 40 bit coding key 69 WEP KEY 4 Wireless LAN coding key No 4 5 9 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 5 3 4 Self Diagnostic Test and Result Print Out W
210. key functions LCD Message Display 16 characters x 2 lines POWER LED Green ON LINE LED Green ERROR LED Red FEED key RESTART key PAUSE key The LCD Message Display shows messages in alphanumeric characters and symbols to indicate the printer s status Up to 16 characters in 2 lines can be displayed There are three LEDs on the Operation Panel LED In System Mode the FEED RESTART and PAUSE keys function as described below Used to start the system mode as a PAUSE key does Used to select the parameter mode or to fine adjust the parameters in the negative direction RESTART Used to select the parameter mode to fine adjust the parameters in the positive direction Used to start the system mode as a FEED key does and to select the parameter mode Used as an enter key NOTE Use the RESTART key to resume printing after a pause condition or after clearing an error 5 1 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 2 OVERVIEW 5 2 OVERVIEW System Mode consists of nine main menus Self Diagnostic Test Parameter Setting Printer Parameter Fine Adjustment Test Print Sensor Adjustment RAM Clear IP Address Setting Basic Setting and Factory Mode While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x message appears on the display RESTART This is the start of the Self Diagnostic Test menu lt
211. l fine adjustment for the black mark 0 0V to 4 0V sensor 20 Threshold manual fine adjustment for the feed gap sensor 0 0V to 4 0V 21 Character PC 850 PC 851 PC 1252 LATIN9 PC 852 PC 855 PC 1253 Arabic PC 1251 PC 1257 Baud rate 2400 2400 bps 38400 38400 bps RR E mn 9600 9600 bps 19200 19200 bps 8 8 bits 24 Stop bit length selection 2 2 bits 25 Parity NON None EVEN EVEN Transmission control code XON XOFF XON XOFF READY BUSY READY BUSY DTR XON READY AUTO XON XOFF READY BUSY DTR XON XOFF AUTO XON XOFF READY BUSY RTS RTS NOTE Since the resolution of the B SX4T s print head is 8 dots mm setting the fine adjustment value to 2 and will become the same result Therefore will be printed regardless of X 2 mm settings In the same way X 7mm setting will be printed as X 8mm N QN Mm lt 8 9 2 2 2 3 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST Language selection for LCD message ENGLISH English GERMAN German FRENCH French DUTCH Dutch SPANISH Spanish JAPANESE Japanese ITALIAN Italian Auto forward wait ON Available OFF Unavailable NOTE The stop position fine adjustment value is also printed out Head up on in cut mode ON Available OFF Unavailable Rewinder selection ON Rewinder is used TO 8 OFF Rewinder is not used AUTO Automatic selection
212. l safety in handling or maintaining the equipment is extremely important Warnings and Cautions necessary for safe handling are included in this manual All warnings and cautions contained in this manual and written inside or outside of the printer should be read and understood before handling or maintaining the equipment Never modify the machine Except for the addition of options as specifically provided for in the service manual change or modifications to the machine are not approved Unauthorized changes or modifications may not comply with your country s safety standards Safety Precaution Electrical equipment is dangerous Electrical shock from such equipment can cause death Never operate electrical equipment unless authorized to do so by a responsible authority In emergency work on electrical equipment is authorized be sure that it is performed in strict compliance with approved safety regulations The following safety precautions will help to ensure proper use of the printer Turn off the printer before 1 opening the top cover for any reason 2 attaching detaching any cable and memory cards Disconnect the power cord whenever you are working inside the printer Keep your work environment static free TEC Thermal Printer B SX4T QQ QP TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION CE Compliance for EU only This product complies with the requirements of EMC and Low Voltage Directives including their amendments VORSICHT
213. lues of Data length Parity Control code LCD message language are different according to the destination code 5 5 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 9 IP ADDRESS SETTING 5 9 IP ADDRESS SETTING Outline of the IP Address Setting In the IP Address Setting mode you can set the IP Address Gateway Address Subnet Mask DHCP and DHCP 10 which are necessary for a network communication Since each setting value is different depending on your operating environment The IP Address Setting menu contains the following lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS PAUSE lt 7 gt 1 ADDRESS PRINTER IP ADRES Printer IP Address Setting RESTART FEED lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS GATEWAY IP ADRES Gateway IP Address Setting RESTART FEED lt 7 gt LP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Subnet Mask Setting RESTART i FEED lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS 0 Socket Port Setting RESTART FEED lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS DHCP Setting RESTART i FEED lt T gt IP ADDRESS DHCP CLIENT ID DHCP ID Setting RESTART FEED While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Message appears gt lt Press the FEED key 6 times The printer is at the start of the IP Address Setting menu P ADDRESS When lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS appears press the PAUSE key Select the IP Ad
214. ly type flash memory is possible if it has been used on the TOSHIBA printer such as B 472 and B 572 3 5 EXPANSION I O INTERFACE BOARD 7704 option for the B SX4T This interface board is used to connect the printer to external devices such as a labeler The input output signals from the connected external devices can control label feeding or printing and indicate the print status 3 OPTIONAL KIT EO10 33013A 3 6 BUILT IN LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM 3 6 BUILT IN LAN INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 LAN QM This board enables the printer to connect to the host by means of Local Area Network Supporting 10 100M bps Internal 32 bit wide data pass for the packet buffer memory Conforming to IEEE 802 3 802 3u 100 Base Tx 10Base T physical layer Auto negotiation 10 100M bps Full Half Duplex 3 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM Installing this board enables a connection to a PC which has a USB interface e Conforming to USB 1 1 Supporting Full speed 12M bps transmission Supporting the two types of data transmission types Control transmission and Bulk transmission PRINTED IN JAPAN TOSHIBA TEG CORPORATION EO10 33013A TEC Thermal Printer B SXAT SX5T SERIES Maintenance Manual Document No 18 33012 Original Jan 2003 Revised Feb 2003 PRINTED IN JAPAN TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION Follow manual instructions Failure to do so could create safety hazards such as
215. maximum 0 7 A 124 W maximum During standby 0 19 A 15 W maximum 0 16 A 16 W maximum Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C 40 F to 104 F Relative humidity 25 to 85 RH no condensation Resolution 12 dots mm 306 dpi Printing method Thermal transfer or Thermal direct Printing speed 76 2 mm sec 3 inches sec 127 0 mm sec 5 inches sec details refer to Section 1 3 1 203 2 mm sec 8 inches sec Available media width including 30 0 mm to 140 0 mm 1 2 inches to 5 5 inches backing paper Effective print width max 128 0 mm 5 inches Issue mode Batch Strip Cut Cut mode is enabled only when the optional Cutter Module is installed LCD Message display 16 characters x 2 lines Dimension W x D x H 291 mm x 460 mm x 308 mm 11 5 x 18 1 x 12 1 Weight 44 Ib 20 kg Media and ribbon are not included Available bar code types JAN8 JANI3 EAN8 EAN8 2 digits EAN8 5 digits EAN13 EAN13 2 digits EAN13 5 digits UPC E UPC E 2 digits UPC E 5 digits UPC A UPC A 2 digits UPC A 5 digits MSI ITF NW 7 CODE39 CODE93 CODE128 EAN128 Industrial 2 to 5 Customer Bar Code POSTNET KIX CODE RM4SCC ROYAL MAIL 4STATE CUSTOMER CODE RSS14 Available two dimensional code Data Matrix PDF417 QR code Maxi Code Micro PDF417 CP Code Available font Times Roman 6 sizes Helvetica 6 sizes Presentation 1 size Letter Gothic 1 size Prestige Elite 2 sizes Courier 2 sizes OCR 2 types Gothic 1 si
216. me 4 Ribbon end sensor Reflective sensor When printing in thermal transfer mode using the ribbon this sensor detects the difference in potential between the ribbon and the ribbon end to indicate the ribbon end It is positioned at 48 28 mm from the platen Ribbon Ribbon End Sensor Print Head Pinch Roller Feed Roller Side Frame 1 OUTLINE EO10 33013A 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS 5 Slit sensor Transmissive sensor This sensor detects the rotation count of the ribbon shaft and the ribbon motors The ribbon motors torque works to take up slack in the ribbon and is dependent on the detected count The slit sensor is a photo coupler combining an LED and a transistor Slit Slit Rewind Slit Gear Feed Slit Gear Slit Sensor Rewind Slit Sensor Feed 6 Strip sensor Transmissive sensor This sensor detects whether or not the label has been taken away from the media outlet and controls the label feed It is positioned 17 8 mm from the platen Print Head Strip Sensor Tr 17 8 mm H 7 9 NNA Platen Strip Shaft Strip Sensor LED Backing Paper EO10 33013A 1 OUTLINE 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS 7 Rewind full sensor Transmissive sensor This sensor detects that the built in rewinder is full when winding backing paper or printed media onto the take up spool It is positioned at 316 4 mm Tr side and 272 mm LED side from the platen A rewinder full status is
217. media automatically Then turn the Locking Ring clockwise to secure the Supply Holder NOTE Do not over tighten the Locking Ring of the Supply Holder Groove Damper Supply Holder Projection Supply Shaft Locking Ring In case of a label rolled with In case of a label rolled with the print side facing inside the print side facing outside Media Damper 8 Place the media between the Media Guides adjust the Media Guides to the media width and tighten the Locking Screw 9 Check that the media path through the printer is straight The media should be centred under the Print Head Media Guide Print Head Supply Holder Locking Screw Media Media Guide E2 7 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 7 Loading the Media 2 7 Loading the Media Cont NOTE Be sure to set the black mark sensor to detect the centre of the black mark otherwise a paper jam or no paper error may occur 10 Lower the Print Head Block until it stops 11 After loading the media it may be necessary to set the Media Sensors used to detect the print start position for label or tag printing Setting the Feed Gap Sensor position 1 Remove the Locking Screw that secures the Media Sensor 2 Manually move the Media Sensor so that the Feed Gap Sensor is positioned at the centre of the labels indicates the position of the Feed Gap Sensor 3 Tighten the Locking Screw Gap
218. media and ribbon may shorten the head life and result in problems with bar code readability or print quality All media and ribbon should be handled with care to avoid any damage to the media ribbon or printer Read the following guideline carefully e Do not store the media and ribbon for longer than the manufactures recommended shelf life e Store media rolls on the flat end do not store them on the curved sides as this might flatten that side causing erratic media advance and poor print quality e Store the media in plastic bags and always reseal after opening Unprotected media can get dirty and the extra abrasion from the dust and dirt particles will shorten the print head life e Store the media and ribbon in a cool dry place Avoid areas where they would be exposed to direct sunlight high temperature high humidity dust or gas For further information please contact your local distributor or your media and ribbon manufacturer 2 5 3 OPTIONAL KIT EO10 33013A 3 1 CUTTER MODULE B 4205 QM Swing Cutter B 8204 QM Rotary Cutter 3 OPTIONAL KIT Swing cutter B 4205 QM This cutter module uses a swing or rotary cutter It cuts module backing paper of labels and tag paper automatically in Stop Rotary cutter B 8204 QM and cut mode module Strip module B 9904 H QM This strip module strips the label from the backing paper B SX4T only with the take up block and strip block When the rewinder guide plate is attached
219. mes ready to receive data and converts the DTR signal to High level READY The printer converts the DTR signal to Low level BUSY when the free area in the receive buffer amount to 10K bytes or less The printer converts the signal to High level READY when the free area in the receive buffer amount to 512KB or more When there is no free area in the receive buffer the printer discards received data which exceeds the receive buffer capacity without storing it in the buffer After detecting a BUSY signal the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer becomes full RTS signal is always High level XON XOFF DC1 DC3 protocol READY BUSY protocol When initialized after power on this printer becomes ready to receive data and converts the DTR signal to High level READY The printer sends an XON code 11H When the free area in the receive buffer are 10K bytes or less the printer converts the DTR signal to Low level BUSY and sends an XOFF code 13H When the free area in the receive buffer are 512KB or more the printer converts the DTR signal to High level READY and sends an XON code 11H When there is no free area in the receive buffer the printer discards received data which exceeds the receive buffer capacity without storing it in the buffer After detecting the XOFF code or BUSY signal the host computer must stop transmission before the
220. n COM or is selected the default drive communications parameter will be fixed as follows Baud rate 115200bps Parity even Data Length 8 bits and Stop Bit 1 bit 2 The default device is can be set on the main menu screen however it will be cleared at the termination of the download program 6 Select the drive directory in which the firmware file ROM was saved and the file name to be downloaded File information will be showed on the right side of the screen Click on the RUN button E B 5 Downloader Setting Help B SX series Drives Drectries Files download file 18 m OTL File Information device LPT File Information Ey Program Files Drawing EQ TOSHIBA TEC 00227000 Bap ox address 000 0000 ee Eco B EX4T size 000007 0 qd date 2002 11 05 19 28 10 File Sx4 BOOT 1 0 7900 28 ROM NOV D5 2002 ied MAIN S1 O z800 D 7 o4 CG ADOO ROM Cancel END download files ROM E RUN button 49 7 PROGRAM DOWN LOAD 18 33012 7 3 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD 7 following message screen appears Click on the Yes button to start the program download If canceling the download click on the No button B 5X senes Download Program B 54 T Now this program downloaded Are You Sure NOTE While downloading the following message will appear o
221. n PC Board Secure the PCMCIA interface board to the rear plate with the two SM 3x6 screws Rear Plate SM 3x6 Screw 4 21 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 5 PCMCIA INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 PCM QM 6 Secure the PCMCIA interface board to the PCB support plate with the SM 3x6 screw Tighten the two M 3x5 screws that were loosened previously Refer to Caution Support Plate M 3x5 Screw SM 3x6 screw 7 Attach the blind plate A to the rear plate with the two SM 3x6 screws that were removed in step 6 If the LAN interface board or USB interface board is also installed go to the next step NOTE Keep the two SM 3x6 screws and blind plate A safe when the LAN interface board or USB interface board is installed Hear Plate Blind Plate A SM 3x6 Screw lt 8 Reassemble the side panel L in the reverse order of removal If the Expansion I O board was removed at the beginning reassemble it NOTE For inserting removing and handling the PC card refer to the Owner s Manual 4 22 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 6 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM 4 6 USB INTERFACE BOARD B 9700 USB QM This optional interface board is provided with the interface port which allows for the installation of USB devices CAUTION 1 Loosen the two M 3x5 screws of the USB interface board before installing it Failure to do this may cause damage to
222. n rewinder mode For the cut mode the selection switch can be set to either position Selection Switch 2 The backing paper can be wound directly onto the Take up Spool or a paper core When using the Take up Spool detach the Holder Stopper by removing the B 3x4 screw Otherwise it may be difficult to pull out the wound backing paper roll When using a paper core put the core on the Take up Spool with the Holder Stopper on it and Attach the top edge of the backing paper to the core with adhesive tape The Take up Clip is not necessary This winding method is applicable to the Built in Rewinder mode B 3x4 Screw Take up Spool 11 Open the printer block Refer to section 3 3 12 Fix the longer harness of the rewind full sensor and the rewinder harness under the Main PC board with the cable clamp Main PC Board Cable Clamp Rewinder Harness Longer Har Rewind Full Sensor Tr 4 14 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 3 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM 13 Secure the strip sensor LED and strip sensor Tr to the printer with the SM 4x8B screws 14 Connect the shorter harness of the strip sensor Tr to the strip sensor harness for LED otrip Sensor Tr m SM 4x8B Screw SM 4x8B Screw i L ag f Strip Sensor LED Shorter Harness of the Strip Strip Sensor Sensor Harness for Tr Harness for LED 15 Fix the connected strip sen
223. n the LCD display respectively Data in the Flash ROM is being erased ERASING The printer is receiving data RECEIVING Data is being written into the Flash ROM PROGRAMMING 8 While the printer prepares for the downloading part of the screen may be disordered After approximately 15 seconds the following screen will appear causing the firmware to be transferred d B SX Downloader Setting Help B SX series Download Program Drives Drectries Files download file c PRELOAD CAProgram FilesiTOSHIBA TECIB SAIDVWALOWS44 MAIN 1 0 2900 aca device LPT Program Files te address 000 0000 B 8X File Informatian Drawing FFMOO22 7000 Model Name E 000007 0 Size 1000007 0 DE v1 0 date 082411105 19 28 10 Date oA4 BOOT 10 2900 28 ROM NOV 05 2002 amp x4 MAIN A 0 2900 D7 ROM o4 CG ADOO ROM rest 1536 Kbytes EE download files 2 ROM 9 After the firmware was transferred successfully the display returns to the main menu screen 10 After data was written into the Flash ROM successfully the message COMPLETE appears on the LCD display And then the printer will restarts automatically 11 Click on the END button to terminate the download program 7 6 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE EO18 33012A 8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 8 PERIODIC MAINTE
224. nd call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative 6 1 6 18 33012 6 ON LINE MODE Error messages continued Error Messages Problems Cause PAPER JAM 1 The media is jammed in the media path The media is not fed smoothly A wrong Media Sensor is selected for the media being used Ihe Black Mark Sensor is not correctly aligned with the Black Mark on the media Size of the loaded media is different from the programmed size 1 Remove jammed media and clean the Platen Then reload the media correctly Finally press the RESTART key Turn the printer off and then Then select the Media Sensor for the media being used Finally resend the print job Adjust the sensor position Then press the RESTART key Replace the loaded media with one which matches the programmed size then press the RESTART key or turn the printer off and then on select a programmed size that matches the loaded media Finally resend the print job The Feed Gap Sensor 5 Refer to Section 5 4 to set the distinguish the print area from a label threshold If this does not solve the gap problem turn off the printer and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative PAPER 1 The media has run out 1 Load new media Then press the RESTART key 2 media is not loaded properly 2 Reload the media cor
225. ng participating nations ENERGY STAR is a U S registered mark This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable rotection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and sed in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operations of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense for USA only Changes or modifications not expressly approved by manufacturer for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada TEC for CANADA only Copyright 2003 by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 570 Ohito Ohito cho Tagata gun Shizuoka ken JAPAN Safety Summary ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 Safety Summary Personal safety in handling or maintaining the equipment is extremely important Warnings and Cautions necessary for s
226. ng the Power Cord to prevent possible electric shock or damage to the printer Use only the Power Cord supplied with the printer Use of any other cord may cause electric shock or fire Connect the Power Cord to a supply outlet with a properly grounded earthed connection Power Switch 2 Connect the Power Cord to the printer as shown in the figure below Power Cord 3 Plug the other end of the Power Cord into a grounded outlet as shown in the figure below Power Cord QQ Type QP Type E2 4 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 6 Turning the Printer ON OFF 2 6 Tu rning the Printer When the printer is connected to your host computer it 1s good practice to ON OFF turn the printer ON before turning on your host computer and turn OFF your host computer before turning off the printer 2 6 1 Turning ON the Printer 1 To turn ON the printer power press the Power Switch as shown in the CAUTION diagram below Note that is the power ON side of the switch Use the power switch to turn the printer On Off Plugging or unplugging the Power Cord to turn the printer On Off may cause fire an electric shock or damage to the printer Power Switch NOTE If a message other than ON LINE appears on the display or 2 Check that the ON LINE message appears in the LCD Message ii PE 5 Display and that ON LINE and POWER LED lights are illuminated go to Section 5 1 Er
227. nk ribbon can be seen from the front of the printer on the rear of the Print Head 5 Block to detect a ribbon end When a ribbon end is detected NO RIBBON message will appear on the display and the ERROR LED will illuminate 6 Turn the Head Lever to Lock position to close the Print Head 7 Close the Top Cover 2 12 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 8 Loading the Ribbon 2 8 Loading the Ribbon Cont NOTE Ribbon loss per ribbon saving varies according to the relation between the outer roll diameter of the used ribbon and the print speed Ribbon loss Ribbon saving Approx 5 mm Approx 8 mm Approx 17 mm Auto Ribbon Saving Mode When the auto ribbon saving function 15 selected it will be activated to reduce ribbon loss when a no print area extends more than 20 mm For further information on this function please ask a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative E2 13 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 2 9 Inserting the Optional PCMCIA Cards 2 9 Inserting the Optional When the optional PCMCIA Interface Board is installed into the printer PCMCIA Cards there will be two PCMCIA slots available as shown in the figure below This allows the use of Flash Memory type Cards or I O Cards such as LAN Cards The following paragraphs outline how to insert PCMCIA CAUTION protect cards discharge static electricity from your
228. nsume large amounts of power the voltage will fluctuate widely each time these appliances operate Be sure to provide an exclusive outlet for the machine as this may cause fire or electric shock Do not insert or drop metal flammable or other foreign objects into the machines through the ventilation slits as this may cause fire or electric shock If the machines are dropped or their cabinets damaged first turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet and then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Continued use of the machine in that condition may cause fire or electric shock Do not plug in or unplug the power cord plug with wet hands as this may cause electric shock Do not place metal objects or water filled containers such as flower vases flower pots or mugs etc on top of the machines If metal objects or spilled liquid enter the machines this may cause fire or electric shock Do not scratch damage or modify the power cords Also do not place heavy objects on pull on or excessively bend the cords as this may cause fire or electrical shock Continued use of the machines in an abnormal condition such as when the machines are producing smoke or strange smells may cause fire or electric shock In these cases immediately turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet Then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC rep
229. nt lt K gt Helvetica bold 21point lt L gt Helvetica italic 18point lt M gt PRESENTATION BOLD 27POINT lt N gt Letter Gothic medium 14 3point lt O gt Prestige Elite medium 10 5point lt P gt Prestige Elite bold 15point lt Q gt Courier medium 15point R Courier bold 18point lt 5 gt 0 lt T gt OCR B 12POINT lt q gt Gothic 725 Black 6point Outline Fon A v etica bold Outline gt Helvetica bold P Outline FontE 27 23 456 7 9 308 OutineFontF 0723456789 Outline Font G gt O 7 e2e3456759 x Outline Font H gt Dutch 801 bold Outline Font Brush 738 regular Outline Font J gt Gothic 725 Black EA4 1 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES Cont B Bar codes JANS EANS 4940 Interleaved 2 of 5 12345678905 UPC E 0 123456 EAN13 5 digits 78012 CODE39 Full ASCII ABCDabc UPC E 2 digits 125456 5 EANS42 digits 0458 5 234 9 56786
230. nt Head Cleaner P No 24089500013 from your authorised TOSHIBA TEC service representative E4 1 4 MAINTENANCE ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 4 1 Cleaning 4 1 2 Covers and Panels Wipe the covers and panels with a dry soft cloth or a cloth slightly moistened with mild detergent solution CAUTION DO NOT POUR WATEH directly onto the printer DO NOT APPLY cleaner or detergent directly onto any cover or panel NEVER USE THINNEH OR OTHER VOLATILE SOLVENT on the plastic covers DO NOT clean the panel covers or the supply window with alcohol as it may cause them to discolour loose their shape or develop structural weakness 4 1 3 Optional Cutter Module The swing cutter and rotary cutter are available as an option They are both cleaned in the same way When removing the Cutter Cover of the rotary cutter unit remove the screws from the bottom of the cover 1 Be sure to turn the power off before cleaning the Cutter Module Loosen the two screws to remove the Cutter Cover Remove the Plastic Head Screw to detach the Media Guide Remove the jammed paper Clean the Cutter with a soft cloth slightly moistened with alcohol Reassemble the Cutter Module in the reverse order of removal 2 As the cutter blade is sharp care should be taken not to injure Screw GN yourself when cleaning Plastic Head Screw Nw Cutter Unit Cutter Cover Media Guide _ Fixed Cutter Sw
231. nt start message E2 16 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 2 10 Test Print 2 10 Test Print Cont 19 When you have finished performing the test print operation turn the printer s power OFF then back to ON and check that the LCD Message Display shows ON LINE and that the ON LINE and POWER LED lights are illuminated Sample of the slant line 1 dot test print label 7 m Sample of the slant line 3 dots test print label Sample of the character test print label 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPORS 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLM H 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMN 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLM 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJ D 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJK J 0123456789 ABCDEFGHI E 0123456789 ABCDEFGH 0123456789 ABCDEF 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKL 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJ 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS yous esenocoero um 04224567 P 0123456789 ABCDEFG 01234567 01 01234567890 072584567 0123456789 ABCD 5 0183 5 78 02 T 0123456789 ABCD ABCOEFGHI E2 17 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 2 10 Test Print 2 10 Test Print Cont Sample of the bar code test print label JAN8 EAN8 7 il 0 x TS 1234567890a 4 494010458 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 JAN13 EAN13 J n e 25 5 012545678905 4 1901480 079516 a lt lt 3 CODE39 Standard 9 CODE128 ABCDEFGHI OD ABCDEFG123
232. ntrol of the mechanism TOSHIBA CORPORATION M 1 33034 TEC Thermal Printer B SX5T QQ QP Owner s Manual TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION CE Compliance for EU only This product complies with the requirements of EMC and Low Voltage Directives including their amendments VORSICHT Schallemission unter 70 A nach DIN 45635 oder ISO 7779 e Die fur das Vorgesehene Steckdose muB in der Nahe des Ger tes und leicht zug nglich sein Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corp Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation As an ENERGY STAR Partner TOSHIBA TEC has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAF guidelines for energy efficiency Leer Outline of the International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the penetration of energy efficient computers and other office equipment The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily The targeted products are office equipment such as computers monitors printers facsimiles copiers scanners and multifunction devices Their standards and logos are uniform amo
233. o detect the centre of the black mark otherwise a paper jam or no paper error may occur 10 After loading the media it may be necessary to set the Media ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 7 Loading the Media Lower the Print Head Block until it stops Sensors used to detect the print start position for label or tag printing Setting the Feed Gap Sensor position 1 2 3 Label Media Sensor Locking Screw Remove the Locking Screw that secures the Media Sensor Manually move the Media Sensor so that the Feed Gap Sensor is positioned at the center of the labels gt indicates the position of the Feed Gap Sensor Tighten the Locking Screw Gap Feed Gap Sensor Setting the Black Mark Sensor position 1 2 3 4 Remove the Locking Screw that secures the Media Sensor Pull about 500 mm of media out of the front of the printer turn the media back on itself and feed it under the Print Head past the sensor so that the black mark can be seen from above Manually move the Media Sensor so that the Black Mark Sensor is in line with the center of the black mark on the media indicates the position of the Black Mark Sensor Tighten the Locking Screw Black Mark Sensor n Black Mark Media Sensor Locking Screw E2 8 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 7 Loading the Media 2 7 Loading the Media 12 There are four issue modes available on this printer How
234. older Stopper B 3x4 Screw Take up Spool _ Clip When using a paper core put Take up Clip the core on the Take up Spool Black Screw Strip Backing Paper with the Holder Stopper on it and attach the top edge of the backing paper to the core with adhesive tape The Take up Clip is not necessary This winding method is applicable to the Built in Rewinder mode Front Plate E2 9 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 7 Loading the Media Cont NOTE Be sure to set the Selection Switch to REWINDER position ADJUSTMENT If the media skews when using the Built in Rewinder turn the Adjustment Knob of the Rewinder Guide Plate to correct the media feed Clockwise turn moves the Rewinder Guide Plate forward and counter clockwise moves it backward When the media skews to the Loosen the SM 4x8 screw turn the Adjustment Knob clockwise and then tighten the SM 4x amp screw when the Rewinder Guide Plate is positioned correctly When the media skews to the left Loosen the SM 4x8 screw turn the Adjustment Knob counter clockwise and tighten the SM 4x8 screw when the Rewinder Guide Plate is positioned correctly The cutter is sharp so care must be taken not to injure yourself when handling the cutter CAUTION Be sure to cut the backing paper of the label Cutting labels will cause the glue to stick to the cutter which may affect the cutter quality and shorten the cutt
235. ole 6 Align the notch of the take up holder with the screw hole of the rewinder 55 and attach them to the printer with the four SM 4x8B screws and the SM 4x8C screw 7 Attach the rewind full sensor LED to the base with the SM 3x6B screw 4 12 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 3 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM 8 Fitthe bush to the longer harness of the rewind full sensor Tr and the rewinder harness in the orientation shown below Rewinder Ass y SM 4x8B Screw Notch SM 4x8C Screw Longer Harness of the Rewind Full Sensor Tr SM 4x8B Screw Rewinder Harness Bush Take up Holder Base Rewind Full Sensor LED SM 3x6B Screw 9 Insert the longer harness of the rewind full sensor Tr into the hole in the printer frame Fit the bush into the hole Frame gi Hole Bush Longer Harness of the Rewind Full Sensor Tr 4 13 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 3 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM 10 Connect the longer harness of the rewind full sensor Tr and the rewinder harness to CN4 and CN15 on the Main PC board respectively 15 Main PC Board Longer Harness of the Rewind Full Sensor Tr Rewinder Harness NOTES 1 You should change the selection switch setting depending on the issue mode Improper setting may affect the print quality STANDARD PEEL OFF STRIP Batch or strip mode REWINDER Built i
236. ont The cutter is sharp so care must be taken not to injure yourself when handling the cutter CAUTION Be sure to cut the backing paper of the label Cutting labels will cause the glue to stick to the cutter which may affect the cutter quality and Shorten the cutter life Use of tag paper when the thickness exceeds the specified value may affect the cutter life ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 7 Loading the Media Cut mode When the optional Cutter Module is fitted the media is automatically cut A swing cutter and a rotary cutter are available as an option but they are used in the same way Insert the leading edge of the media into the Media Outlet of the Cutter Module m B 13 Cutter Module Media _ 7 Media Outlet If the loaded media is direct thermal media a chemically treated surface the media loading procedure is now completed Close the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate and turn the Head Lever to Lock position to close Then close the Top Cover If the media 1s thermal transfer media it is also necessary to load a ribbon Refer to Section 2 8 Loading the Ribbon E2 11 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 2 8 Loading the Ribbon Be careful not touch the Print Head Element when raising the Print Head Block Failure to do this may cause Print Head Block missing dots by static electricity or other print quality problems l Be sure to remove any slack in
237. ontains the thermistor and the feed gap sensor photo transistor The media sensor lower contains the black mark sensor and the feed gap sensor photo diode 10 11 1 Removing the Media Sensor Ass y 1 Open the top cover Refer to Section 3 1 2 Open the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 3 Remove the two TT 3x5 screws from the media sensor upper 4 Remove E 3 e ring TT 3x5 Screw Pinch Roller Block ee LN IT e P Media Sensor Upper E 3 E ring 5 Open the printer block Refer to Section 3 2 6 Pull the media sensor ass y and the media sensor shaft to the direction indicated by the arrow And then remove the sensor guide from the printer frame Media Sensor Ass y Media Sensor Shaft Sensor Guide 10 26 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER 7 Disconnect the black harness from the media sensor upper and the white harness from the media sensor lower respectively NOTE The other end of the sensor harness is connected to CN51 on the Main PC board pr e Sensor Upper Sensor Harness E 1 d Media Sensor Lower Sensor Guide 8 Remove the sensor guide from the media sensor ass y while moving it to the direction indicated by the arrow Sensor Guide Sensor Guide Media Sensor Ass y Media Sensor Ass y 10 27 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER 10 11 2 Replac
238. or not According to the position of the print head block the arm on it turns the sensor on off 3 Media sensor This sensor is comprised of the black mark sensor and feed gap sensor It is positioned 92 1 mm from the platen The sensor position is adjustable according to the black mark position It can be manually moved from the center to the left edge of media Black mark sensor Reflective sensor This sensor detects the difference of potential between the black mark and tag paper to find the print position of the tag paper Side detection max Center detection 1 Center 70 mm Center 93 mm Tag Paper Black Mark Feed Gap Sensor Black Mark Sensor Feed Gap Sensor Black Mark Sensor Main Frame Side Frame Main Frame Side Frame EO10 33013A 1 OUTLINE 1 5 ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS Feed gap sensor Transmissive sensor This sensor detects the difference in potential between the backing paper and the label to find the print position of the label The feed gap sensor is located at 8 mm to the right of the black mark sensor Side detection max Center detection Center of Label 7 Home Position 78 5 Center of Label Home Position 1 8mm Label Backing Paper 101 mm Backing Paper N N 5 Feed Gap Sensor Feed Gap Sensor Main Frame Black Mark Sensor Black Mark Sensor Main Frame Side Fra
239. overs are fixed with the hooks respectively Feed Roller Holder Cover 10 23 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 10 PINCH ROLLER ASS Y 10 10 PINCH ROLLER ASS Y 1 Open the top cover Refer to Section 3 1 2 Open the printer block Refer to Section 3 3 3 Remove the two SMW 3x6 screws to remove the pinch roller side plate SMW 3x6 Screw Pinch Roller Side Plate 4 Detach the pinch roller ass y from the pinch roller block Pinch Roller Block Pinch Roller Ass y 10 24 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 10 PINCH ROLLER ASS Y 5 Replace the pinch roller ass y with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e Tighten the two SMW 3x6 screws with 58 8 to 88 2 cm torque When reassembling the pinch roller ass y make sure that the cam is located as the picture below shows Pinch Roller Shaft Pinch Roller Arm When reassembling the pinch roller ass y insert the pinch roller arm into the space below the flat spring Flat Spring Pinch Roller Arm Flat Spring e Fit the shaft into the opening of the pinch roller block Shaft Pinch Roller Ass v 10 25 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER NOTE The media sensor ass y is composed of the media sensor upper and the media sensor lower The media sensor upper c
240. p amp Remaining flash memory capacity for storing writable characters 0 to 3147 in K bytes perse Restoration by of LCD Message Printer Status RESTART ke 2 2 POWER ONLNE ERROR E 2 LINE O Inonlinemode Yes ON LINE ONLINE Jolej e In online mode The printer in ESSEN communication HEAD OPEN oO ele pu head block is opened in 7 3 PAUSE e 9 Theprinterispaused A parity overrun or framing error has a 4 COMMS ERROR occurred during communication through m RS 232C 5 PAPERJAM e The media is jammed during paperfeed Yes 6 CUTTER rote for problem has occurred with the cuter Yes Yes module NO PAPER The media has run out or the media 15 Yes Yes not loaded properly RIBBON Q QO The ribbon has run out Yes Yes HEAD OPEN Feed or printing was attempted with the Yes Yes print head block open HEAD ERROR There is a problem with the print head EXCESS HEAD TEMP 9 2 The print head is overheated The ribbon has been torn A problem Yes Yes has occurred with the sensor determines the torque for the ribbon motor nr rewinder unit In writable character PC command Yes 14 jo save mode SAVING THHE amp amp An error has occurred while writing to Bal pneu NE memory or ATA card erase error has occurred 16 FO
241. pecified requirements Use of non specified media and ribbons may shorten the head life and result in problems with bar code readability or print quality All media and ribbons should be handled with care to avoid any damage to the media ribbons or printer Read the guidelines in this section carefully ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 4 2 Care Handling of the Media and Ribbon e Do not store the media or ribbon for longer than the manufacturer s recommended shelf life Store media rolls on the flat end Do not store them on the curved sides as this might flatten that side causing erratic media advance and poor print quality e Store the media in plastic bags and always reseal after opening Unprotected media can get dirty and the extra abrasion from the dust and dirt particles will shorten the print head life e Store the media and ribbon in a cool dry place Avoid areas where they would be exposed to direct sunlight high temperature high humidity dust or gas e The thermal paper used for direct thermal printing must not have specifications which exceed 800 ppm 250 ppm and 500 ppm e Some ink used on pre printed media may contain ingredients which shorten the print head s product life Do not use labels pre printed with ink which contain hard substances such as carbonic calcium and kaolin 281O 2 For further information please contact your local distributor or your med
242. pensing mode can be selected 5 NO CUT Batch printing IC WITH CUT Cut printing or H PEEL OFF Strip printing After selecting the dispensing mode to be used press the PAUSE key SISDIAQ RESTART TYPELS NO CUT lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x TYPELC WITH CUT S NO CUT Batch printing C WITH CUT Cut printing FEED NOTE When using the cutter module be sure to select C WITH CUT When using neither cutter module nor strip module be sure to select 5 NO CUT 5 4 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 5 3 3 Maintenance Counter Parameter Settings Print Out The printer is ready to print out the Maintenance Counter Parameter Settings Press the PAUSE key to start lt 1 gt DIAG MAINTENANCE CONT The printer starts printing out the Maintenance Counter Parameter Settings During printing the message below appears on the display lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x CHECKING amp PRINT After printing is completed the display returns to lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Print Sample 1 TOTAL FEED 1 1km 2 FEED 1 1km 3 PRINT 0 5km 4 CUT 96 5 HEAD U D 32 6 HIBBON 3h 7 SOLENOID Oh 8 232C ERR 255 9 SYSTEM ERR 0 10 POWER FAIL 0 PC KEY 11 FEED 2 0mm FEED 0 0mm 12 0 0mm CUT 1 0mm 13 0 0mm BACK 0 0mm 14 0 step TONE T 0 step 15 D 0 step TONE D 0 step 16 RBN FW 10 RBN FW 8 17
243. ply press into place as shown in the diagram below ensuring connecting pins are aligned with the connecting holes Filter Pad o 9599969 0 209699060 9906059 295599 29069 3290956 3290569 Filter Retainer A Snap On E2 2 2 PRINTER SETUP 2 4 Connecting the Cables to Your Printer NOTES 1 The picture on the right shows the layout of the interface connectors when the options are fully installed It may be different depending on your system configuration The USB interface and LAN interface cannot be used at the same time ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 4 Connecting the Cables to Your Printer The following paragraphs outline how to connect the cables from the printer to your host computer and will also show how to make cable connections to other devices Depending on the application software you use to print labels there are 4 possibilities for connecting the printer to your host computer These are A serial cable connection between the printer s RS 232 serial connector and one of your host computer s COM ports Refer to APPENDIX 3 A parallel cable connection between the printer s standard parallel connector and your host computer s parallel port LPT e An Ethernet connection using the optional LAN board e A USB cable connection between the printer s optional USB connector and your host computer s USB port Conforming to USB 1 1 The diagram below sho
244. r press the PAUSE key The printer stops printing PAUSE 52 BST V1 0A 3 Press and hold the RESTART key for 3 seconds or longer 4 Press the PAUSE key The data sent from computer will be cleared and the printer returns to an idle condition ON LINE V1 0A E3 2 3 ON LINE MODE ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 3 4 Dump Mode In Dump mode any characters sent from the host computer will be 3 4 Dump Mode printed Received characters are expressed in hexadecimal values This allows the user to verify programming commands and debug the program For details please refer to your nearest TOSHIBA TEC service representative E3 3 4 MAINTENANCE ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 4 1 Cleaning 4 MAINTENANCE WAR This chapter describes how to perform routine maintenance Be sure to disconnect the To ensure the continuous high quality operation of the printer you should power cord before perform a regular maintenance routine For high throughput it should be performing maintenance done on a daily basis For low throughput it should be done on a weekly Failure to do this may basis cause an electric shock To avoid injury be careful not to pinch your fingers while opening or closing the cover and print head block The print head becomes hot immediately after printing Allow it to cool before performing any maintenance Do not pour water directly onto the printer 4 1 Cleaning To maint
245. r is connected to the AC mains with a three prong power cable that has the proper ground earth connection Do not operate the printer with the cover open Be careful not to allow fingers or articles of clothing to get caught into any of the moving parts of the printer especially the optional cutter mechanism Make sure to turn off the printer power and to remove the power cord from the printer whenever working on the inside of the printer such as changing the ribbon or loading the media or when cleaning the printer For best results and longer printer life use only TOSHIBA TEC recommended media and ribbons Store the media and ribbons in accordance with their specifications This printer mechanism contains high voltage components therefore you should never remove any of the covers of the machine as you may receive an electrical shock Additionally the printer contains many delicate components that may be damaged if accessed by unauthorised personnel Clean the outside of the printer with a clean dry cloth or a clean cloth slightly dampened with a mild detergent solution Use caution when cleaning the thermal print head as it may become very hot while printing Wait until it has had time to cool before cleaning Use only the TOSHIBA TEC recommended print head cleaner to clean the print head Do not turn off the printer power or remove the power plug while the printer is printing or while the ON LINE lamp is blinking E2 1
246. r pre printe B SY5T 1 0 labels within software commands allows the 4 The printer enters the pause mode printer to detect the proper 5 Press and hold the PAUSE key for at least 3 seconds in the pause print start position even state when using pre printed Jobels TRANSMISSIVE If using the Transmissive V1 0A E PUE 6 The sensor type is displayed continues to print out of position even after setting 7 Select the sensor to be adjusted by pressing the FEED key the threshold contact a TOSHIBA TEC service REFLECTIVE Black mark sensor representative 8 5 51 1 0 FEED key Y TRANSMISSIVE Feed gap sensor V1 0A 8 Press and hold the PAUSE key until more than 1 5 labels tags have been issued The media will continue to be fed until the PAUSE key is released Threshold setting for the selected sensor is completed by this operation PAUSE 5 51 V1 0A 9 Press the RESTART key ON LINE Basho V1 0A 10 The printer is in stand by 11 Send an issue command from the PC to the printer ON LINE V1 0A E5 4 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 A1 1 Printer APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS Appendix describes the printer specifications and supplies for use on the 5 printer 1 1 Printer The following 15 the printer specifications Supply voltage 100 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC220 240V 50 Hz 10 Power consumption During a print job 1 7 A 130 W
247. rameter you can select the communication data length of the RS 232C interface When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 3 times lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET LENG 68015 Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART FEED DATA LENG 7bits After selecting the data length press the PAUSE key 5 4 5 Stop Bit Selection With this parameter you can select the stop bit of the RS 232C interface When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 4 times SET SLOP Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART FEED STOP 2bits After selecting the stop bit press the PAUSE key C1 21 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 4 PARAMETER SETTING 5 4 6 Parity Selection With this parameter you can select the parity of the RS 232C interface When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 5 times PARAMETER SET PARITY NONE Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option PARITY EVEN RESTART PARITY ODD FEED PARITY NONE After selecting the parity press the PAUSE key 5 4 7 Transmission Control Code Selection With this parameter you can select the transmission control code
248. rectly Then press the RESTART key 3 The media 15 slack 3 Take up any slack in the media RIBBON ERROR The ribbon is not fed properly Remove the ribbon and check the status of the ribbon Replace the ribbon if necessary If the problem is not solved turn off the printer and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative NO RIBBON The ribbon has run out Load a new ribbon Then press the RESTART key REWIND FULL The Built In Rewinder Unit is full Remove the backing paper from the Built In Rewinder Unit Then press the RESTART key EXCESS HEAD TEMP The Print Head has overheated Turn off the printer and allow it to cool down about 3 minutes If this does not solve the problem call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative Other error messages A hardware or software problem may Turn the printer off and then on If this have occurred does not solve the problem turn off the printer again and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative 6 2 6 ON LINE MODE 18 33012 6 ON LINE MODE B LCD message and LED indication Symbols in the message 1 O The LED is illuminated The LED is flashing The LED is unlit 2 the number of unprinted media Up to 9999 in pieces 3 9 09 9 9 9 9 ATA Card s remaining memory 0 to 9999999 in bytes 4 Flash memory card remaining memory for PC save area 0 to 895 in K bytes 5 amp amp amp
249. resentative for assistance Safety Summary Disconnect Connect a grounding wire If foreign objects metal fragments water liquids enter the machines first turn off the power switches and disconnect the power cord plugs from the outlet and then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Continued use of the machine in that condition may cause fire or electric shock Ensure that the equipment is properly grounded Extension cables should also be grounded Fire or electric shock could occur on improperly grounded Disconnect the plug ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 When unplugging the power cords be sure to hold and pull on the plug portion Pulling on the cord portion may cut or expose the internal wires and cause fire or electric shock Do not remove covers repair or modify the machine by yourself You may be injured by high voltage very hot parts or sharp edges inside the machine equipment This indicates that there is the risk of personal Injury or damage to N CAUTION objects if the machines are improperly handled contrary to this indication Precautions The following precautions will help to ensure that this machine will continue to function correctly e Try to avoid locations that have the following adverse conditions Temperatures out of the specification Direct sunlight High humidity Shared power source Excessive vibration Dust Gas The cover should be cleaned
250. ress the PAUSE key to show the current black mark sensor status 5 52 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 7 SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 5 7 2 Black Mark Sensor Adjustment lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ LREPEEGT T ues The status detected by the Black Mark Sensor 0 0V to 5 0V Follow the Black mark sensor adjustment procedure below 1 Load a tag stock in the B SX series printer so that the Black Mark Sensor detects a print area no black mark 2 Press and hold the RESTART or FEED key for more than 3 seconds lt 5 gt SENSOR ADJ ERE PEG EY 18 When the adjustment is completed appears 3 Remove the tag stock from the printer 4 Press the PAUSE key to show the current Feed Gap Sensor status 5 7 3 Feed Gap Sensor Adjustment lt S gt SENSOR AD LTRANS 2 3V L s tatus detected by the Feed Gap Sensor 0 0V to 5 0V Follow the Feed Gap Sensor adjustment procedure below 1 Place the backing paper labels are removed in the B SX series printer so that the Feed gap Sensor detects it 2 Press and hold the RESTART or FEED key for more than 3 seconds lt S SENSOR ADJ LTRANS 4 1V L When the adjustment is completed appears 3 Remove the backing paper from the printer 4 Press the PAUSE key to show the current status of the Black Mark Sensor and the Feed Gap Sensor with no paper 9 93 5 SYSTEM MODE EO18 33012A 5 7 SENSOR ADJUSTMENT 5 7 4 Black Mark Sensor and Feed G
251. return to NO RAM CLEAR 5 8 3 Maintenance Counter Clear MAINTE CNT CLEAR Press the PAUSE key to perform the Maintenance Counter Clear When the Maintenance Counter Clear is completed the following message appears pe COMPLETE NS Turn off the printer to exit this mode Initial values after clearing the maintenance counter MANTE CNT CLEAR 5 8 4 Printer Parameter Clear PARAMETER CLEAR Press the PAUSE key to show the destination code selection display cep Tames opecifications for North Central South America RESTART s a MN opecifications for Europe and Asia move Specifications for Japan FEED X CN TYPE Specifications for China Select the destination code of the printer being used and press the PAUSE key to perform a Printer Parameter Clear When the Printer Parameter Clear is completed the following message appears mae COMPLETE ess Turn off the printer to exit this mode 5 56 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 8 RAM CLEAR Initial values after clearing the parameters PARAMETER CLEAR Feed length fine adjustment PC KEY Cut Strip position fine adjustment PC KEY Back feed length fine adjustment PC KEY Print tone fine adjustment Thermal transfer PC KEY 000 S Print tone fine adjustment Thermal direct PC KEY 0 Ribbon take up motor driving voltage fine adjustment Se PC KEY Ribbon feed motor driving voltage fine adjustment
252. ribbon and check the status of the ribbon Replace the ribbon if necessary If the problem is not solved turn off the printer and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative NO RIBBON The ribbon has run out Load a new ribbon Then press the RESTART key REWIND FULL The Built In Rewinder Unit 15 full Remove the backing paper from the Built In Rewinder Unit Then press the RESTART key EXCESS HEAD TEMP The Print Head has overheated Turn off the printer and allow it to cool down about 3 minutes If this does not solve the problem call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative Other error messages A hardware or software problem may Turn the printer off and then on If this have occurred does not solve the problem turn off the printer again and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative 5 2 Possible Problems This section describes problems that may occur when using the printer and their causes and solutions Possible Problems The printer will not The Power Cord is disconnected Plug in the Power Cord turn on 2 The AC outlet is not functioning 2 Test with a power cord from another correctly electric appliance The fuse has blown or the circuit Check the fuse or breaker breaker has tripped The media is not fed The media is not loaded properly Load the media properly 2 The printer is in an error condition 2 Solve the error in the message display See Se
253. rly The print head 15 not installed Install the print head properly Close properly the Print Head Block The ribbon and media are not Select an appropriate ribbon for the matched media type being used The printed image is The ribbon and media are not select an appropriate ribbon for the blurred matched media type being used The Print Head is not clean Clean the print head using the Print Head Cleaner or a cotton swab slightly moistened with ethyl alcohol The cutter does not The Cutter Cover is not attached Attach the Cutter Cover properly cut properly The media is jammed in the Cutter Remove the jammed paper The cutter blade is dirty Clean the cutter blade E5 2 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 5 3 Removing Jammed Media 5 3 Removing Jammed Media CAUTION Do not use any tool that may damage the Print Head NOTE If you get frequent jams in the cutter contact a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative This section describes in detail how to remove jammed media from the printer 1 Turn off and unplug the printer 2 Open the Top Cover 3 Turn the Head Lever to Free position then open the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 4 Open the Print Head Block 5 Remove the ribbon and media Print Head Block Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 6 Remove the jammed media from the printer DO NOT USE any sharp implements or tools as these could damage the pr
254. rness Also secure the LCD together with the ground wire LCD Harness LCD Ground Wire 10 5 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 3 PANEL PC BOARD AND LCD UNIT 10 3 2 Panel PC Board 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Remove the operation panel ass y Refer to Section 3 4 3 Remove the two LCD harnesses and the six TT 3x8 screws from the LCD TT 3x8 Screw LCD Harness Panel PC Board TT 3x8 Screw 4 Detach the panel PC board from the operation panel ass y Operation Panel Ass y 5 Disconnect the LCD harness from the panel PC board LCD Harness Panel PC Board 6 Replace the panel PC board with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal NOTE When reassembling lead the LCD harness through the space Failure to do this may cause the cover to catch the harness Hefer to Section 10 3 1 10 6 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 4 STEPPING MOTOR 10 4 STEPPING MOTOR 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 Disconnect the stepping motor harness from CN16 on the Main PC board 3 Remove the stepping motor harness from the cable clamp and the bush Main PC Board Stepping Motor Stepping Motor Harness Bush 4 Remove the two SMW 4x8 screws from the stepping motor And then detach the stepping motor from the printer while taking the two timing belts off the pulley Pulley Timing Belt i SMW 4x8 Screw
255. ror Messages 2 6 2 Turning OFF the Printer 1 Before turning off the printer Power Switch verify that the ON LINE message appears in the LCD Message Display and that the ON LINE CAUTION LED light is on and is not flashing 1 Do not turn off the printer 2 To turn OFF the printer power press the Power Switch as shown in the power while the media is diagram below Note that O is the power OFF side of the switch being printed as this may cause a paper jam or damage to the printer Do not turn off the printer power while the ON LINE lamp is blinking as this may cause damage to your computer Power Switch E2 5 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 7 Loading the Media 2 Loading the Media Do not touch any moving parts To reduce the risk of fingers jewellery clothing etc being drawn into the moving parts be sure to load the media once the printer has stopped moving completely The Print Head becomes hot immediately after printing Allow it to cool before loading the media To avoid injury be careful not to trap your fingers while opening or closing the cover CAUTION Be careful not to touch the Print Head Element when raising the Print Head Block Failure to do this may cause missing dots by static electricity or other print quality problems NOTES 1 When the Head Lever is turned to Free position the Print Head is raised To allow printing the Head
256. roved by TOSHIBA TEC For information regarding TOSHIBA TEC approved media please contact a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative A1 3 1 Media Type Two types of media can be loaded for this thermal transfer and direct thermal printer label or tag The table below shows size and shape of the media available for this printer Black Mark Black Mark Label 2 Refer to paper on reverse side Stop position 198 position iw Cut position V N Nape 16 d 7 d Cut position EA1 2 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 A1 3 Media A1 3 1 Media Type Cont Unit mm T Batch mode Strip mode Rotary cutter Swing cutter Label 10 0 1500 0 25 4 1500 0 38 0 1500 0 38 0 1500 0 Media pitch S fsec 30 0 Tag 10 0 1500 0 we Label length 8 0 1498 0 23 4 14980 25 0 14940 25 0 1494 001 Width including backing paper 30 0 140 0 50 0 140 0 30 0 112 0 30 0 140 0 See NOTE 5 Label width See NOTE 5 27 0 137 0 47 0 137 0 27 0 109 0 27 0 137 0 6 0 20 0 2 0 10 0 10 0 128 0 23 0 1492 0 3 sec 5 sec 28 0 1496 0 8 sec 36 0 1496 0 23 0 1496 0 1 0 0 13 0 17 Thickness Tag NOTES To ensure print quality and print head life use only TOSHIBA TEC specified media The media length specifications for use of the cutter are
257. rse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e When reassembling make sure that the head up was attached to the head up sensor plate in the correct direction e Fit the positioning tabs of the head up sensor plate into the positioning holes of the printer frame Head Up Sensor Plate Positioning Tab Positioning Hole 10 33 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT EO18 33012A 10 13 PRINTER OPEN SENSOR 10 13 PRINTER OPEN SENSOR 1 Remove the side panel 1 Refer to Section 3 2 2 Disconnect the sensor harness from the printer open sensor ass Y 3 Remove the SMW 3x6 screw to detach the printer open sensor ass y from the printer SMW 3x6 Screw Printer Open Sensor Ass y Sensor Harness 4 Detach the printer open sensor from the printer open sensor plate in the following steps NOTE The printer open sensor is attached to the plate with the four hooks 1 Pull the printer open sensor in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the two hooks on the connector side 2 Move the printer open sensor in the direction indicated by the arrow to unhook the other hooks 3 Detach the printer open sensor from the plate Printer Open Sensor Plate m LI Printer Open Sensor 2 10 34 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 13 PRINTER OPEN SENSOR 5 Replace the printer open sensor with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the follo
258. rt printing the slant line patterns dots After printing is completed the display returns to lt 4 gt TEST PRINT Pressing the PAUSE key causes the display to show SLANT LINE 3DOT again Then press the FEED key m Print Sample of Slant Line 3 dots 5 6 5 Characters CHARACTERS While selecting the Characters press the PAUSE key to start printing the characters After printing is completed the display returns to lt 4 gt TEST PRINT Pressing the PAUSE key causes the display to show CHARACTERS again Then press the FEED key Print Sample of Characters A 0123ABCDEFGHIJ G o123ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 8 0123ABCDEFG H 0123ABCDEFGHIJ C 1 0123ABCDEFG 0723456 0123456 ABCDEFG 5 48 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 6 TEST PRINT 5 6 6 Barcode BARCODE While selecting the Barcode press the PAUSE key to start printing the bar codes After printing is completed the display returns to lt 4 gt TEST PRINT Pressing the PAUSE key causes the display to shown BARCODE again Then press the FEED key Print Sample of Barcodes AN8 EAN8 4 NW7 1234567890 494 5 JAN13 EAN13 0 JAN8 0 ST 2 ITF e ca 012345618905 4 901480 079516 DE128 lt 3 CODE39 Standard 9 A CO ABC123 CDEFGHI 5 6 7 Non Printing NON PRINTING While selecting the Non printing press the PAUSE key to start issuing a
259. s for codes other than codes 20H to 7FH and to DFH EA2 2 APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE APPENDIX 3 INTERFACE B Interface Cables To prevent radiation and reception of electrical noise the interface cables must meet the following requirements e Fully shielded and fitted with metal or metallised connector housings Keep as short as possible Should not be bundled tightly with power cords e Should not be tied to power line conduits B RS 232C Cable description The serial data cable used to connect the printer to the host compute should be one of the following two types DB 9S DB 25P Connector to PC Connector to Printer L FG Shield DB 25S DB 25P Connector to PC Connector to Printer 6 DSR 20 i 80 DIR 20 NOTE Use an RS 232C cable with the connector including inch type securing screws for the QO model or metric type securing screws for the model EA3 1 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES APPENDIX 4 PRINT SAMPLES B Font A Roman medium 12point lt B gt Times Roman medium 15point lt C gt Times Roman bold 15point lt D gt Times Roman bold 18point E limes Roman bold 21 point lt gt Roman italic 16point G Helvetica medium 9point lt H gt Helvetica medium 15point lt Helvetica medium 18point lt J gt Helvetica bold 18poi
260. s from CN19 on the Main PC board 3 Remove the SMW 3x6 and the two SMW 4x6 screws to detach the power supply unit from the printer Main PC Board SMW 4x6 Screw SMW 3x6 Screw SMW 4x6 Screw 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 4 Disconnect the power harness from the power supply unit 5 Replace the power supply unit with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal Power Harness 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 2 MAIN PC BOARD 10 2 MAIN PC BOARD 1 Remove the side panel L Refer to Section 3 2 2 For the B SX5T series remove the expansion I O board Refer to Section 4 3 Disconnect all the cables from the MAIN PC board Cutter Strip Module B SX4 Option B SX5 Standard Cutter Module Option CD erial Interface PCMCIA LAN USB Interface Board Option RF ID Interface S RAZ RAIA RA17 RAIBRAZORADDRAZS 24 25 RA26 ae Operation Panel Sensor Ribbon End Sensor he e R120 wa Print Head Signal 5 MAIN Centronics Interface 1FM00017000 icto sa Ree 7 B SX4 Option ECP E B SX5 Standard Strip Sensor B SX4 Option B SX5 Standard Fan Motor Stepping Motor RS 232C Interface 25 pin Power Supply Unit Print Head Pow
261. s manual turn off the power unplug the machine then contact your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Meanings of Each Symbol This symbol indicates warning items including cautions Specific warning contents are drawn inside the symbol The symbol on the left indicates a general caution Q This symbol indicates prohibited actions prohibited items Specific prohibited contents are drawn inside or near symbol The symbol on the left indicates no disassembling This symbol indicates actions which must be performed Specific instructions are drawn inside or near the symbol The symbol on the left indicates disconnect the power cord plug from the outlet WARNING This indicates that there is the risk of death or serious injury if the machines are improperly handled contrary to this indication Any other than the Do not use voltages other than specified AC voltage the voltage AC specified on the is prohibited rating plate as this may cause fire or electric shock If the machines share the same outlet with any other electrical appliances that consume large amounts of power the voltage will fluctuate widely each time these appliances operate Be sure to provide an exclusive outlet for the machine as this may cause fire or electric shock Do not insert or drop metal flammable or other foreign objects into the machines through the ventilation slits as this may
262. s to Your Printer The following paragraphs outline how to connect the cables from the printer to your host computer and will also show how to make cable connections to other devices Depending on the application software you use to print labels there are 4 possibilities for connecting the printer to your host computer These are e A serial cable connection between the printer s RS 232 serial connector and one of your host computer s COM ports Refer to APPENDIX 3 e A parallel cable connection between the printer s standard parallel connector and your host computer s parallel port LPT e An Ethernet connection using the optional LAN board A USB cable connection between the printer s optional USB connector and your host computer s USB port Conforming to USB 1 1 The diagram below shows all the possible cable connections to the or current version of the printer D Parallel Interface Connector Centronics Serial Interface Connector RS 232C Expansion I O Interface Connector Power Inlet USB Interface Connector Option PCMCIA Card Slot Option LAN Interface Connector Option E2 3 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 2 5 Connecting the Power Cord 2 5 Connecting the 1 Make sure that the printer Power Switch is in the OFF O position Power Cord CAUTION 1 Make sure that the printer Power Switch is turned to the OFF position O before connecti
263. se and tighten the SM 4x8 screw when the rewinder guide plate is positioned correctly e When labels skew to the left Loosen the SM 4x8 screw with a phillips head screwdriver Turn the adjustment knob counterclockwise and tighten the SM 4x8 screw when the rewinder guide plate is positioned correctly SM 4x8 Screw Adjustment Knob Print start position adjustment Horizontal media position vertical sensor adjustment adjustment by issuing commands Communication test Abnormal noise Confirm that there are not any other errors 11 Close the top cover 12 Clean the outside of the printer 13 Fill out a report form Hand it to the manager and obtain a signature 9 TROUBLESHOOTING EO18 33012A 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 TROUBLESHOOTING Power does not Input voltage to the printer is not Replace the power cable or power turn ON within the rated voltage Check by inlet CN1 on the PS unit Output voltage from the printer is Replace the PS unit not within the rated voltage Check that the voltage between 24V pins 1 2 and 6 and PG pins 3 7 and 8 of CN4 on the PS unit is 24V And check that the voltage between 5V pin 5 and SG pin 4 is 5V No voltage to the MAIN PC board Replace the power harness Check that the voltage between 27 pins 1 2 and 6 and PG pins 8 7 and 8 of CN501 on the MAIN PC board is 24V And check that the voltage between 5V pin 5 and LG pin 4 is 5V Failure of MAIN PC bo
264. selected NOTE Use the RESTART key to resume printing after a pause or after clearing an error This chapter describes usage of the keys on the Operation Panel in On Line mode When the printer is in On Line mode and connected to a host computer the normal operation of printing images on labels or tags can be accomplished e The figure below illustrates the operation panel and key functions a See a zem LCD Message Display ON LINE LED Green POWER LED ime ERROR LED Red 3 FEED key RESTART key PAUSE key The LCD Message Display shows messages in alphanumeric characters and symbols to indicate the printer s current status Up to 32 characters can be displayed on two lines There are three LED lights on the operation panel Illuminates when Flashes when POWER printer is turned on ON LINE The printer is ready to The printer is communicating with your computer ERROR error occurs with The ribbon is nearly the printer over See NOTE There are three kevs on the operation panel PAUSE Used to stop printing temporarily RESTART Used to restart printing Used to feed the media E3 1 3 3 2 Operation 3 3 Reset NOTE If the RESTART key is held for less than 3 seconds when the printer is in an error or pause state the printer restarts printing However when a communica
265. side the machines and may cause a fire or a malfunction Cleaning is particularly effective before humid rainy seasons preventive maintenance service performs the periodic checks and other work required to maintain the quality and performance of the machines preventing accidents beforehand For details please consult your authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance Using insecticides and other chemicals Do not expose the machines to insecticides or other volatile solvents This will cause the cabinet or other parts to deteriorate or cause the paint to peel 11 ENGLISH VERSION 1 33036 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1 1 TAWOGUCTON 1 1 1 2 6 1 1 52 tenner tye 1 1 WA I 1 2 1 9 eo UTE OTT E1 3 OE SNAP Ice E1 3 192 drei oT E1 3 v W HQ 1 3 MS OR ON cp 1 4 1 959 TOTOTIO Eee Re ee ne E1 4 PRINTER SETUP 2 1 lt
266. sor harness for LED to the base with the cable clamp While passing the other strip sensor harness through the cut and the bush reassemble the operation panel ass y to the printer Then pass the strip sensor harness over the tab on the back of the operation panel assy Buch Strip Sensor Harness Operation Panel Ass y Cut Tab Strip Sensor Tr Cable Clamp otrip Sensor Harness for LED NOTE Be careful not to pinch the strip sensor harnesses by the operation panel 4 15 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 3 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM 16 Fix the strip sensor harness with the three cable clamps and connect it to CN20 on the Main PC board Main PC Board CN20 Cable Clamp Strip Sensor Harness 17 Reassemble the side panel L in the reverse order of removal 18 Close the print head block and ribbon shaft holder plate NOTE DO NOT excessively push down the print head block to close it Doing so may cause a failure of the print head block or damage to the print head 19 When using the printer in batch mode or strip mode attach the front plate removed in step 1 20 When using the printer in built in rewinder mode attach the rewinder guide plate to the front of the printer with the two SMW 4x8 screws Rewinder Guide Plate SMW 4x8 Screw SMW 4x8 Screw 21 Make a test print to check for proper strip issue NOTE If the label skews refer to section 8 4 16 4
267. stance Continued use of the machine in that condition may cause fire or electric shock Ensure that the equipment is properly grounded Extension cables should also be grounded Fire or electric shock could occur on improperly grounded Disconnect ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 When unplugging the power cords be sure to hold and pull on the plug portion Pulling on the cord portion may cut or expose the internal wires and cause fire or electric shock Do not remove covers repair or modify the machine by yourself You may be injured by high voltage very hot parts or sharp edges inside the machine equipment This indicates that there is the risk of personal Injury or damage to N CAUTION objects if the machines are improperly handled contrary to this indication Precautions The following precautions will help to ensure that this machine will continue to function correctly e Try to avoid locations that have the following adverse conditions Temperatures out of the specification Direct sunlight High humidity Shared power source Excessive vibration Dust Gas The cover should be cleaned by wiping with a dry cloth or a cloth slightly dampened with a mild detergent solution NEVER USE THINNER OR ANY OTHER VOLATILE SOLVENT on the plastic covers USE ONLY TOSHIBA TEC SPECIFIED paper and ribbons DO NOT STORE the paper or ribbons where they might be exposed to direct sunlight high temperatures high humidity dust or gas
268. t if a ribbon error occurs though the ribbon is proper 5 40 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 5 PRINTER PARAMETER FINE ADJUSTMENT 5 5 7 Threshold Manual Fine Adjustment Black Mark Feed Gap Sensor With this parameter you can fine adjust the Threshold of the Black Mark and Feed Gap Sensors When lt 3 gt ADJUST SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 8 times to enter the Threshold Manual Fine Adjustment Black Mark Sensor menu GSADJUST SET THRESHOLD lt R gt 1 OV Black Mark Sensor To change the screen to the Threshold Manual Fine Adjustment Feed Gap Sensor press the FEED key again lt 3 gt ADJUST SET Feed Gap Sensor THRESHOLD T 1 4V When the LCD display shows THRESHOLD RBP or THRESHOLD lt T gt press the PAUSE key to start And then use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option Black Mark Sensor Feed Gap Sensor THRESHOLD lt R gt 4 OV THRESHOLD T 4 0V THRESHOLD R 3 9V THRESHOLD lt T gt 3 9V RESTART THRESHOLDS RZ 9 THRESHOLD lt IT gt 3 8V THRESHOLD lt R gt 0 1V THRESHOLD lt T gt 0 1V FEED THRESHOLD lt R gt 0 O0V THRESHOLD lt T gt 0 0V FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 0 1V change up to 0 0V RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 0 1V change up to 4 0V After completing the fine adjustment press the PAUSE key NOTE This is useful to fine adjust the threshold when the media issue is improper even after
269. ted depending on the type of character code O1 C5 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST e Descriptions 1 Program ROM Check Model Name Date Version Part number Checksum PROGRAM B SX4T 7 00226000 No of ROM or software Model name 5 4 B SX4T GS10 QQ QP B SX5T B SX5T TS12 QQ QP MAIN 010 2002 V1 0 1 00 Main area Checksum software version Revision No Space or A to Z BOOT 160 2002 V1 0A 8500 Boot area Checksum software version Revision No Space or A to Z 2 Alphanumeric Font ROM Check FONT 5600 Checksum of Font area Font area 3 Kanji ROM Check KANJI NONE 0000 Kanji area Ma a Checksum NONE Kanji ROM is not installed GOTHIC Gothic bit map Kanji ROM is installed NONE 0000 Checksum NONE Kanji ROM is not installed MINCHO Mincho bit map Kanji ROM is installed CHINESE Chinese character bit map Kanji ROM is installed 4 EEPROM Check EEPROM OK OK Data in the check area can be properly read written NG Data in the check area cannot be properly read written EEPROM Backup Memory b SDRAM Capacity SDRAM 8MB Capacity of DRAM B SX4T 8MB B SX5T 16 System Painting memory 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 3 SELF DIAGNOSTIC TEST 6 PC Card Slot Check CARD SLOT 1 ATA SLOT2 LAN ATA ATA Card is inserted LAN LAN card is inserted F
270. the FEED or Ta RESTART key FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte Repeat entering the values FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF until the 16th byte value is ied 9th byte 10th byte 11th byte 12th byte 13th byte 14th byte 15th byte 16th byte Exampl FF PAUSE ampie FE FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FD After the 16th byte value is set the FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF RESTART display returns to lt 7 gt IP ADDRESS RESTART 0 OF OOFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 9E 21P ADDRESS FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FEED PAUSE FEED 03 FEED Es Y OOFDFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 5 60 5 SYSTEM MODE 18 33012 5 10 BASIC SETTING 5 10 BASIC SETTING Outline of Basic Setting Setting the BASIC specification and Trace specification to be enabled disabled and displaying the program file data file and area file are available in this mode The Basic Setting menu contains the following lt 8 gt BASIC PAUSE lt 8 gt BASIC VIN BASIC Specification Selection Mode RESTART FEED lt 8 gt BASIC FILE MAINTENANCE BASIC File Browser RESTART FEED lt B gt BASIC BASIC TRACE BASIC Trace Selection Mode RESTART FEED While pressing the FEED and PAUSE keys at the same time turn on the printer Hold both keys until the lt 1 gt DIAG Vx x Message appe
271. the media sensor lower fit the positioning pins of the sensor holder lower into the positioning holes e When reassembling the sensor cover lower fit the cut portion onto the portion B of the sensor holder lower Positioning Hole Sensor Cover Lower Media Sensor Lower Positioning Pin Cut Portion Portion B Sensor Holder Lower Positioning Pin 10 29 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER 10 11 4 Reassembling the Media Sensor Ass y After replacing the media sensors reassemble the media sensor ass y into the printer in the following procedure 1 Attach the sensor guide to the media sensor ass y so that the tabs slide along the rails Sensor Guide Tab Tab 2 Connect the black harness to the media sensor upper and the white harness to the media sensor lower respectively Black Harness Sensor Harness e d Media Sensor Upper 4 ae Media Sensor Lower 10 30 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 11 MEDIA SENSORS UPPER LOWER 3 Attach the sensor guide to the printer so that the hook fits onto the frame Attach the media sensor ass y Also attach the sensor shaft to the printer so that it passes through the two shaft holders T Media Sensor Ass y Sensor Guide Hook Sensor Shaft Sensor Guide Shaft Holder 4 Close the printer block 5 Fix the sensor shaft with the E 3 e ring
272. the parameter setting when the printer is delivered Therefore to use the ribbon saving function on the B SX4T series it is necessary to install the B 9904 R QM optional ribbon saving module and to enable the ribbon saving function by the parameter setting Regarding the B SX5T series you only need to enable the ribbon saving function by the parameter setting When enabling the ribbon saving function it must be set depending on the head lever position For details please contact the nearest TOSHIBA TEC service representative or sales agent Printer model and option Head lever position Parameter setting Ribbon saving function B SX5T TS12 QQ Position Label RBN SAVE OFF B SX5T TS12 QP or Default B SX4T TS10 QQ Position Tag B SX4T TS10 QP B SX5T TS12 QQ Position Label RBN SAVE ON Label Enabled for label B SX5T TS12 QP B SX4T T910 QQ B 9904 R QM position 2 Tag RBN SAVE ON TAG Enabled for tag paper B SX4T TS10 QP B 9904 R QM NOTES 1 Be sure to match the parameter setting to the head lever position according to the media type Mismatching may cause a failure of the ribbon saving module 2 The amount of the saved ribbon differs depending on the print pattern and print speed 3 When the head lever position is set to Position 29 Tag and RBN SAVE ON TAG is selected the amount of the saved ribbon is a little less than that of RBN SAVE ON Label with the head lever position Label due to a co
273. the sensor threshold setting is performed See Section 6 1 Threshold Setting 5 41 5 SYSTEM MODE 5 6 TEST PRINT Outline of Test Print In the Test Print mode you can print the test pattern and set Its conditions This is useful to check the print quality of new media or ribbon The Test Print menu contains the following RESTART Auto print mode for factory test Black mark sensor lt 4 gt TEST PRINT AUTO PRINT REFL PAUSE l The printer feeds one media and then prints 5 pcs of the Slant Line 3 dots lt 4 gt PRINT AUTO PRINT REFL PAUSE The printer feeds one media then prints 5 pcs of the Bar Code PAUSE lt 4 gt TEST PRINT AUTO PRINT TRAN PAUSE The printer feeds one media and then prints 5 pcs of the Slant Line 3 dots Y KA TEST PRINT AUTO PRINT TRAN PAUSE The printer feeds one media then prints 5 pcs of the Bar Code Y lt 4 gt PRINT PAUSE Test pattern selection I lt 4 gt 51 PRINT PRINT CONDITION FEED RESTART lt 4 gt TEST PRINT SLANT LINE IDOT FEED RESTART lt 4 gt TEST PRINT SLANT LINE 3DOT FEED RESTART lt A gt TEST PRINT CHARACTERS RESTART lt 4 gt PRINT
274. the tag paper and label with backing paper are wound Ribbon saving B 9904 R QM The ribbon saving module moves the print head up and module down by using a solenoid to save the ribbon loss as far as B SX4T only possible PCMCIA interface B 9700 PCM QM This board enables use of the following PCMCIA cards LAN card 3 COM EtherLink III recommended ATA card Conforming to PC card ATA standard Flash memory card 1MB and 4MB card interface board B SX4T only interface board board has a USB interface NOTE To purchase the optional kits please contact the TOSHIBA TEC Head Quarters 3 1 CUTTER MODULE B 4205 QM Swing Cutter B 8204 QM Rotary Cutter This compact cutter module uses a built in swing rotary cutter The specification is provided below Cutter Type B 4205 QM B 8204 QM Cut method Media width B SX4T 30 0 mm 112 0 mm B SX5T 30 0 mm 140 0 mm 30 0 mm 112 0 mm 25 4 mm 1500 0 mm 3 sec 6 sec 30 0 mm 1500 0 mm 38 0 mm 1500 0 mm 3 sec 6 sec 38 0 mm 1500 0 mm 3 sec b sec 30 0 mm 1500 0 mm 25 4 mm 1500 0 mm 8 sec 38 0 mm 1500 0 mm 38 0 mm 1500 0 mm 0 15 0 29 mm 0 13 0 17 mm 300000 cuts 0 274 mm thick tag paper 1000000 cuts 0 160 mm thick tag paper Photo coupler Swing 32 8 mm Ein Rotary 77 1 mm rint Head Pinch Roller N Feed Roller 3 EO10 33013A 3 2 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM option for th
275. tion error or command error occurs the printer returns to an idle condition ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 3 2 Operation When the printer is turned on the ON LINE message appears on the LCD Message Display It is shown during standby or normal printing 1 The printer 15 turned on standing by or printing ON LINE B SX4T V1 0A 2 If any error occurs during printing an error message appears The printer stops printing automatically The number on the right side shows the remaining number of media to be printed NO PAPER 1 25 B SX4T V1 0A 3 To clear the error press the RESTART key The printer resumes printing ON LINE 5 4 V1 0A 4 If the PAUSE key is pressed during printing the printer stops printing temporarily The number on the right side shows the remaining number of media to be printed PAUSE Dd B SX4T V1 0A 5 When the RESTART key is pressed the printer resumes printing B SX4T V1 0A A reset operation clears the print data sent from the computer to the printer and returns the printer to an idle condition 1 The printer 15 turned on standing by or printing ON LINE 5 4 V1 0A 2 To stop printing or clear the data sent from the computer press the PAUSE key The printer stops printing PAUSE 52 5 4 V1 0A 3 Press and hold the RESTART key for 3 seconds or longer STRESET 4 Press the PAUSE key The data sent from the computer will be cleared and t
276. tional strip module is attached 6 Type of bar code two dimensional code 1 INO aet lt lt lt 8 JAN13 EAN13 UPC A UPC E EAN8 EAN13 UPC A UPC E 2digit EAN8 EAN13 UPC A UPC E 5digit NW 7 CODE39 STANDARD CODE39 FULL ASCII ITF MSI CODE93 CODE128 EAN128 Data Matrix 7 Bar code rotation 09 90 180 270 PDF417 QR Code Industrial 2 of 5 Customer Bar Code POSTNET RM4SCC Royal Mail 4 State Customer Code KIX CODE Maxi Code Micro PDF417 CP CODE RSS14 1 OUTLINE 8 Magnification of bar code UPC EAN JAN CODE93 128 PDF417 UPC A E EAN8 13 JAN8 13 CODE93 EAN128 CODE128 Min Module Width mm PDF417 EO10 33013A 1 4 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS Up to 6 modules be automatically calculated using 1 module width designation 1 to 15 dots edie onmi code c Dots Module Bar code UPC A E EAN8 13 JAN8 13 CODE93 EAN128 CODE128 Min Module Width mm PDF417 E NW 7 CODE39 ITF MSI Industrial 2 of 5 The width of narrow bars wide bars and spaces can be optionally changed in a range of 1 to 99 dots B Data Matrix 9 Type of characters B SX4T 1 09 o 0919 Times Roman medium 12 15 point Times Roman bold 15 18 21 point Times Roman Italic 18 point Helveti
277. tive NO RIBBON The ribbon has run out Load a new ribbon Then press the RESTART key REWIND FULL The Built In Rewinder Unit 15 full Remove the backing paper from the Built In Rewinder Unit Then press the RESTART key EXCESS HEAD TEMP The Print Head has overheated Turn off the printer and allow it to cool down about 3 minutes If this does not solve the problem call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative Other error messages A hardware or software problem may Turn the printer off and then on If this have occurred does not solve the problem turn off the printer again and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative 5 2 Possible Problems This section describes problems that may occur when using the printer and their causes and solutions Possible Problems The printer will not The Power Cord is disconnected Plug in the Power Cord turn on 2 The AC outlet is not functioning 2 Test with a power cord from another correctly electric appliance The fuse has blown or the circuit Check the fuse or breaker breaker has tripped The media is not fed The media is not loaded properly Load the media properly 2 The printer is in an error condition 2 Solve the error in the message display See Section 5 1 for more detail Nothing is printed on The media is not loaded properly Load the media properly the media The ribbon is not loaded properly Load the ribbon prope
278. urface the media loading procedure is now completed Close the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate and turn the Head Lever to Lock position to close Then close the Top Cover If the media is thermal transfer media it is also necessary to load a ribbon Refer to Section 2 8 Loading the Ribbon E2 10 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 8 Loading the Ribbon 2 8 Loading the Ribbon gt ot parts To reduce the risk of fingers jewellery clothing etc being drawn into the moving parts be sure to load the ribbon once the printer has stopped moving completely The print head becomes hot immediately after printing Allow it to cool before loading the ribbon avoid injury be careful not to trap your fingers while opening or closing the cover CAUTION Be careful not touch the Print Head Element when raising the Print Head Block Failure to do this may cause missing dots by static electricity or other print quality problems NOTES When attaching the ribbon stoppers make sure that the pinchers face into the printer Be sure to remove any slack in the ribbon when printing Printing with a wrinkled ribbon will lower the print quality The Ribbon Sensor is mounted on the rear of the Print Head Block to detect a ribbon end When a ribbon end is detected RIBBON message will appear on the display and the ERROR LED will illuminate NOTE Ribbon loss per ribbon saving
279. urier bold 12 point OCR A B 12 point Outline font Helvetica bold Helvetica bold proportional Price Font 1 2 3 Times roman proportional Pop Proportional Proportional Writable characters 2 byte character is available 12 PC 1250 13 PC 855 14 PC 851 1 EO10 33013A 1 4 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS 12 White or black background all types of characters are available Character rotation O 90 180 270 14 Character strings rotation O 90 180 270 15 Type of line 1 Horizontal line 2 Vertical line 3 Slant line 4 Square 5 Rounded Rectangle 6 Circle 1 6 LING 0 1 to 0 9 mm can be specified in unit of 0 1 17 Mechanism 1 Batch mechanism This is the standard mechanism which lets the printer print continuously without winding the label or tag paper A lt Ribbon End Sensor Pinch Print Head Roller Platen KI Lo Black Mark 2 2 Strip mechanism B SX4T series Option When the strip module is attached labels are stripped from the backing paper by the strip shaft The next label will not be printed until the preceding label is taken away The backing paper is wound onto the take up spool By installing the rewinder guide plate the tag paper and label can be wound onto the take up spool Ribbon End Sensor Pinch Print Head Strip Sensor iee op ES
280. used select the Media Sensor for the media being used Finally resend the print job The Black Mark Sensor is not Adjust the sensor position Then press correctly aligned with the Black the RESTART key Mark on the media Size of the loaded media is different Replace the loaded media with one from the programmed size that matches the programmed size then press the RESTART key or turn the printer off and then on select a programmed size that matches the loaded media Finally resend the print job The Feed Gap Sensor cannot Refer to Section 5 4 to set the distinguish the print area from a label threshold If this does not solve the gap problem turn off the printer and call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative CUTTER ERROR The media is jammed in the cutter Remove the jammed media Then press Only when the cutter the RESTART key If this does not module is installed on solve the problem turn off the printer and the printer call a TOSHIBA TEC authorised service representative E5 1 5 TROUBLESHOOTING ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 5 2 Possible Problems 5 1 Error Messages Cont NO PAPER 1 The media has run out 1 Load new media Then press the RESTART key 2 The media is not loaded properly 2 Reload the media correctly Then press the RESTART key 3 The media is slack 3 Take up any slack in the media RIBBON ERROR The ribbon is not fed properly Remove the
281. utlet CN 7 2 Tab Screw 13 Close the print head block and ribbon shaft holder plate NOTE DO NOT excessively push down the print head block to close it Doing so may cause failure of the print head block or damage to the print head 14 Reassemble the side panel L and close the top cover Finally check the cutter operation 4 10 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 3 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM 4 3 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM This optional device is used for strip print which cannot be used together with either B 4205 QM or B 8204 H QM NOTE The strip module is standard on the B SX5T series All the following parts are supplied with the kit Make sure you have all items shown below Rewinder Ass y 1 pc Rewinder Guide Plate 1 pc Bush 1 pc Rewind Paper Guide 1 pc Installation Manual 1 copy SM 4x8B Screw 10 pcs SM 3x6B Screw 1 pc SM 4x8C Screw 1 pc 4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EO18 33012A 4 3 STRIP MODULE B 9904 H QM Remove the two black screws to detach the front plate Refer to section 4 1 2 Open top cover Refer to Section 3 1 3 Remove the side panel L from the printer Refer to section 3 2 4 Remove the operation panel ass y from the printer Refer to section 3 4 5 Attach the rewind paper guide to the base with the two M 4x8 screws Rewind Paper Guide M 4x8 Screw Screw H
282. utton pops out Eject Button Slot 1 Memory type cards only Slot 2 I O type cards such as LAN cards Model Name Printed Side 3 Slightly pull and fold the Eject Button upward Eject Button 4 The following PCMCIA cards can be used San Disk A card conforming to the ATA Cara Hitachi PC card ATA standard e Install into the slot 2 LAN Card 3 COM 3CCE589ET Series only This card installed into the slot 1 will not work Maxell EF 4M TB Maxell EF 4M TB Read Write Centennial Technologies INC FL04M 15 11119 03 INTEL IMCOO4FLSA Simple Flash Memory TECNOLOGY STI FL 4A Card 4 MB Mitsubishi MF84M1 G7DATO1 i Read See NOTE o PC Card Mitsubishi Card 1 MB Mitsubishi E2 12 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33034 2 10 Test Print 2 10 Test Print A print test should be performed to check that the printer is operating correctly The following paragraphs guide you through the diagnostic procedure for test label printing Please follow the step by step procedures exactly for best results 1 Use label stock for the test print For best results use labels that are 76 mm or longer in length 2 Press and hold the FEED and PAUSE keys while turning on the lt 4 gt TEST PRINT 4 Press the PAUSE key and the print condition setting display will appear lt 4 gt TEST PRINT PRINT CONDITION 5 Press the PAUSE key and the issue count setting display will appear Set
283. varies according to the relation between the outer roll diameter of the used ribbon and the print speed Ribbon loss Ribbon saving Approx 6 mm Approx 10 mm Approx 20 mm There are two types of media available for printing on these are thermal transfer media and direct thermal media a chemically treated surface DO NOT LOAD a ribbon when using a direct thermal media 1 Grasp the tabs on the top and bottom of the Ribbon Stoppers and move the Ribbon Stoppers back to the end of the Ribbon Shaft on Stopper Ribbon Shaft 2 Leaving plenty of slack between the ribbon spools place the ribbon onto the Ribbon Shafts as shown below Ribbon Take up Roll 3 Slide the Ribbon Stoppers along the Ribbon Shafts to a position where the ribbon is centred when fitted 4 Lower the Print Head Block and set the Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate aligning its holes with the Ribbon Shafts 5 Take up any slack in the ribbon Wind the leading tape onto the ribbon take up roll until the ink ribbon can be seen from the front of the printer do Ce E Ribbon Shaft Holder Plate 6 Turn the Head Lever to Lock position to close the Print Head T Close the Top Cover B Auto Ribbon Saving Mode When the auto ribbon saving function 15 selected it will be activated to reduce ribbon loss when a no print area extends more than 20 mm 3 or 6 ips or 30 mm 10 ips For further information on this function please ask a TOSHIBA TEC author
284. which the LCD message is displayed When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 7 times lt 27 gt PARAMETER SET LCD ENGLISH Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option ENGLISH RESTART ITALIAN JAPANESE SPANISH FEED DUTCH FRENCH GERMAN After selecting the language press the PAUSE key 5 4 9 Auto Forward Wait Selection With this parameter you can select whether or not the Auto Forward Wait function is activated This function used in the cut mode automatically feeds the media for about 16 4 mm if there is more than 3 second idle time after printing to prevent the media from curling When lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET appears press the PAUSE key and the FEED key 8 times lt 27 gt PARAMETER SET FORWARD WAIT OFF Press the PAUSE key to start Use the FEED or RESTART key to select a desired option RESTART FORWARD WAIT ON Available FEED FORWARD WAIT OFF Unavailable When ON is selected pressing the PAUSE key will result that the LCD Message Display shows the stop position fine adjustment value setting screen lt 2 gt PARAMETER SET POSITION Dmm POSITION 5 0mm RESTART POSITION 0 0mm FEED POSITION 5 0mm FEED key Pressing the FEED key one time causes a 0 5mm change up to 5 0 mm RESTART key Pressing the RESTART key one time causes a 0 5 change up to 5 0 mm After s
285. wing points When reassembling make sure that the printer open sensor was attached to the printer open sensor plate in the correct direction e Fit the positioning tabs into the positioning holes of the printer frame Printer Open Sensor Plate Positioning Tab Positioning Hole 10 35 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 14 RIBBON END SENSOR 10 14 RIBBON END SENSOR 1 Open the top cover Refer to Section 3 1 2 Open the printer block Refer to Section 3 3 3 Remove the SMW 3x6 screw to detach the ribbon end sensor ass y from the printer Ribbon End Sensor Ass y SMW 3x6 Screw 4 Disconnect the sensor harness from the ribbon end sensor ass y and then detach the ribbon end sensor ass y from the printer Sensor Harness Ribbon End Sensor Ass y 10 36 10 MAJOR UNIT REPLACEMENT 18 33012 10 14 RIBBON END SENSOR 5 Remove the SMW 3x6 screw to detach the ribbon end sensor and the ribbon end sensor cover from the ribbon end sensor plate Ribbon End Sensor p M Ribbon End Sensor Plate Ribbon End Sensor Cover SMW 3x6 Screw 6 Replace the ribbon end sensor with a new one then reassemble in the reverse order of removal At this time take care of the following points e When reassembling make sure that the ribbon end sensor was attached to the ribbon end sensor plate in the correct direction e Assemble the ribbon end sensor cover and the ribbon end sensor so that the p
286. ws all the possible cable connections to the or current version of the printer Parallel Interface Connector Centronics Serial Interface Connector RS 232C Expansion I O Interface Connector Option Power Inlet USB Interface Connector Option PCMCIA Card Slot Option LAN Interface Connector Option E2 3 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 5 Connecting the Power Cord 2 5 Con necting the 1 Make sure that the printer Power Switch is in the OFF O position Power Cord CAUTION 1 Make sure that the printer Power Switch is turned to the OFF position O before connecting the Power Cord to prevent possible electric shock or damage to the printer Use only the Power Cord supplied with the printer Use of any other cord may cause electric shock or fire Connect the Power Cord to a supply outlet with a properly grounded earthed connection Power Switch 2 Connect the Power Cord to the printer as shown in the figure below Power Cord 3 Plug the other end of the Power Cord into a grounded outlet as shown in the figure below Power Cord QQ Type QP Type E2 4 2 PRINTER SETUP ENGLISH VERSION 1 33034 2 6 Turning the Printer ON OFF 2 6 Tu rning the Printer When the printer 15 connected to your host computer it is good practice to ON OFF turn the printer ON before turning on your host computer and turn OFF your host computer before
287. ze Outline font 4 types Price font 3 types Rotations 09 90 180 270 Standard interface Serial interface RS 232C Parallel interface Centronics Expansion I O interface Optional interface PCMCIA interface B 9700 PCM QM USB interface B 9700 USB QM LAN interface B 9700 LAN QM NOTES Data trademark of International Data Matrix Inc U S 417 is a trademark of Symbol Technologies Inc US Code 15 a trademark of DENSO CORPORATION Maxi Code is a trademark of United Parcel Service of America Inc U S EA1 1 APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS ENGLISH VERSION EO1 33036 A1 2 Options A1 2 Options Option Name Swing cutter module 4205 A stop and cut swing cutter Rotary cutter module B 8204 QM PCMCIA interface 9700 This board enables the use of the following PCMCIA cards board LAN card 3 COM 3 59 recommended card Conforming to PC card ATA standard Flash memory card IMB and 4MB cards See Section 2 9 interface board B 9700 USB OM Installing this board enables a connection to a PC which has USB interface NOTE To purchase the optional kits please contact the nearest authorised TOSHIBA TEC representative or TOSHIBA TEC Head Quarters A1 3 Media Please make sure that the media being used is approved by TOSHIBA TEC The warranty does not apply when a problem is caused by using media that is not app

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  MANUAL DE USUARIO  HID Identity R10 Reader 6100  ロータリ真空ポンプ RPV06 シリーズ  RDR-HX919  GT310 - General Tools And Instruments  GOCLEVER TITANIUM GPS  avertissement - BRP -  FOR MODEL OPAL-100/200 RUBY-100/200    

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file